Santerno Dcreg2 Dcreg4 d500 Manual

15P0059B3
DCREG2
DCREG4
USER MANUAL
15/07/08 R.06
SOFTWARE VERSION D5.00
English
This manual is an integral and essential part of the product. Carefully read the instructions contained
herein as they provide important hints for use and maintenance safety.
This device shall be used only for the purposes it is aimed at. Any other use is to be considered as
improper and dangerous. The manufacturer is not responsible for any possible damage caused by
improper, erroneous and irrational uses.
Elettronica Santerno are responsible for the device in its original setting.
Any changes to the structure or operating cycle of the device must be performed or authorized by
Elettronica Santernos Engineering Department.
Elettronica Santerno are not responsible for the consequences resulting from the use of non-original
spare parts.
Elettronica Santerno reserve the right to make any technical changes to this manual and the device
without prior notice. Any misprint or spelling mistake will be edited in the new versions of this manual.
Elettronica Santerno are responsible for the information contained in the original version of the Italian
manual.
The information contained herein is Elettronica Santernos property and cannot be reproduced.
Elettronica Santerno enforce their rights on the drawings and catalogues according to the law.
Elettronica Santerno S.p.A.

Strada Statale Selice, 47 - 40026 Imola (BO) Italia
Tel. +39 0542 489711 - Fax +39 0542 489722
www.elettronicasanterno.com sales@elettronicasanterno.it
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
2/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS...........................................................................................................................3
1 DELIVERY CHECK..........................................................................................................................9
2 START-UP ...................................................................................................................................10
2.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................10
2.2 PRELIMINARY CHECKS ........................................................................................................10
2.3 MAIN CHECKS AND CONFIGURATIONS ............................................................................11
2.4 SPEED CONTROL MODE OPERATION.................................................................................13
2.5 RAMP CONFIGURATION IN SPEED CONTROL MODE .........................................................14
2.6 SPEED CONTROL OPTIONS................................................................................................14
2.7 CURRENT (TORQUE) CONTROL MODE OPERATION...........................................................15
2.8 CURRENT LIMIT CONTROL OPTIONS..................................................................................16
2.9 ANALOG AND DIGITAL OUTPUTS ......................................................................................17
2.10 BACKUP AND RESTORATION OF STORED PARAMETERS ......................................................17
3 GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS ......................................................................................................18
3.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION .....................................................................................................18
3.2 RATINGS ............................................................................................................................23
3.3 DCREG SIZE 1 OVERALL DIMENSIONS ................................................................................28
3.4 DCREG SIZE 1 THROUGH-PANEL ASSEMBLY.......................................................................29
3.5 DCREG SIZE 2 OVERALL DIMENSIONS ................................................................................30
3.6 DCREG SIZE 2A OVERALL DIMENSIONS..............................................................................31
3.7 DCREG SIZE 2 AND SIZE 2A THROUGH-PANEL ASSEMBLY ..................................................32
3.8 DCREG MODULAR.S SIZE A POWER SECTION OVERALL DIMENSIONS ................................33
3.9 DCREG MODULAR.S SIZE B POWER SECTION OVERALL DIMENSIONS ................................34
3.10 DCREG MODULAR.S SIZE C POWER SECTION OVERALL DIMENSIONS ................................35
3.11 DCREG MODULAR.S SIZE D POWER SECTION OVERALL DIMENSIONS ................................36
3.12 DCREG MODULAR.S SIZE E POWER SECTION OVERALL DIMENSIONS.................................37
3.13 DCREG MODULAR.S SIZE F POWER SECTION OVERALL DIMENSIONS.................................38
3.14 DCREG MODULAR.S SIZE G POWER SECTION OVERALL DIMENSIONS................................39
3.15 DCREG MODULAR.S SIZE H POWER SECTION OVERALL DIMENSIONS ................................40
3.16 DCREG MODULAR.S SIZE I POWER SECTION OVERALL DIMENSIONS .................................41
3.17 DCREG MODULAR.S SIZE J POWER SECTION OVERALL DIMENSIONS .................................42
3.18 DCREG MODULAR.S SIZE K POWER SECTION OVERALL DIMENSIONS ................................43
3.19 DCREG MODULAR.S SIZE L POWER SECTION OVERALL DIMENSIONS.................................44
3.20 DCREG MODULAR.S CONTROL UNIT OVERALL DIMENSIONS ............................................45
3.21 DCREG SIZE 1...2A POWER CONNECTIONS.......................................................................46
3.22 DCREG MODULAR.S POWER CONNECTIONS ....................................................................48
3.23 DCREG MODULAR.S POWER UNIT WIRING DIAGRAM ........................................................50
3.24 DCREG MODULAR.S CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS...............................................................51
3.25 SUPPLY AND POWER TERMINALS ........................................................................................52
3.26 LEGEND FOR POWER CONNECTIONS ...............................................................................53
3.27 SWITCHING THREE-PHASE INDUCTANCE ...........................................................................55
3.28 DCREG SIGNAL CONNECTIONS ........................................................................................56
3.29 SIGNAL TERMINALS ............................................................................................................57
3.30 LEDS AND TEST POINTS ON CONTROL BOARD .................................................................60
3.31 FEEDBACK FROM ENCODER ..............................................................................................61
3.32 MILLIAMPERE INPUT / OUTPUT SIGNALS.............................................................................62
4 KEYPAD AND ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY ......................................................................................64
4.1 KEYS OPERATING MODALITIES ...........................................................................................64
4.2 FUNCTIONS DISPLAYED BY THE LEDS.................................................................................66
4.3 LOCAL OPERATING MODE.................................................................................................67
4.4 KEYPAD REMOTE CONTROL...............................................................................................68
5 FIRMWARE STRUCTURE ...............................................................................................................71
5.1 GENERAL ...........................................................................................................................71
3/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
5.2 BLOCK DIAGRAM ...............................................................................................................72

5.3 PARAMETER COPY ..............................................................................................................81
6 SPECIAL FEATURES......................................................................................................................83
6.1 AUTOMATIC TUNING.........................................................................................................83
6.2 RAMPS OVER THE REFERENCE.............................................................................................85
6.3 MOTOR POTENTIOMETER ..................................................................................................86
6.4 CURRENT LIMITATION ........................................................................................................87
6.5 OPERATION QUADRANTS ..................................................................................................89
6.6 MOTOR HEATING THERMAL IMAGE....................................................................................92
6.7 FIELD REGULATOR..............................................................................................................93
6.8 CONFIGURABLE DIGITAL OUTPUTS....................................................................................96
6.9 SPEED PARAMETER AUTOADAPTATION ...............................................................................98
6.10 ELECTROMAGNETS APPLICATION.................................................................................... 100
6.10.1 Drive Power Connections And Protecting Devices ....................................................... 100
6.10.2 DCREG4 Electromechanical Diagram For Reference Switching ................................... 103
6.10.3 DCREG4 Setting Parameter Values Different From Default Values............................... 104
6.10.4 DCREG4 Operation Description................................................................................ 105
6.10.5 DCREG2 Electromechanical Diagram For Reference Switching ................................... 107
6.10.6 DCREG2 Setting Parameter Values Different From Default Values............................... 108
6.10.7 DCREG2 Operation Description................................................................................ 109
6.10.8 Energizing/Deenergizing Current Patterns ................................................................. 110
6.10.9 Operation With Safe Batteries ................................................................................... 111
6.10.10 Alarms..................................................................................................................... 112
7 OPERATION PARAMETERS ........................................................................................................ 113
7.1 MEASURE PARAMETERS .................................................................................................... 113
7.1.1 M000: Reference Applied to the Ramps ......................................................................... 113
7.1.2 M001: Speed / Voltage Feedback ................................................................................. 113
7.1.3 M002: Overall Speed/Voltage Reference....................................................................... 114
7.1.4 M003: Armature Current Reference .............................................................................. 114
7.1.5 M004: Armature Current .............................................................................................. 114
7.1.6 M005: Thyristor Firing Delay Angle ............................................................................... 114
7.1.7 M006: Armature Voltage .............................................................................................. 115
7.1.8 M007: Back-electromotive force.................................................................................... 115
7.1.9 M008: Mains Frequency ............................................................................................... 115
7.1.10 M009: Mains Voltage............................................................................................... 115
7.1.11 M010: Auxiliary Analog Input 1 to Terminals 11 and 13 ............................................ 115
7.1.12 M011: Auxiliary Analog Input 2 on Terminal 17 ........................................................ 116
7.1.13 M012: Auxiliary Analog Input 3 on Terminal ............................................................. 116
7.1.14 M013: Up/Down Internal Reference.......................................................................... 116
7.1.15 M014: Main Analog Input to Terminals 5 and 7 ........................................................ 117
7.1.16 M015: Serial Connection Reference .......................................................................... 117
7.1.17 M016: Field Bus Reference ....................................................................................... 117
7.1.18 M017: Field Current Reference ................................................................................. 117
7.1.19 M018: Field Current................................................................................................. 118
7.1.20 M019: Analog Output 1 on Terminal 8 ..................................................................... 118
7.1.21 M020: Analog Output 2 on Terminal 10 ................................................................... 118
7.1.22 M021: Final Internal State of Digital Inputs................................................................ 118
7.1.23 M022: Digital Output State....................................................................................... 119
7.1.24 M023: Field Regulator Internal Digital Input State ...................................................... 119
7.1.25 M024: Output Power................................................................................................ 119
7.1.26 M025: Motor Torque................................................................................................ 119
7.1.27 M026: Encoder Frequency........................................................................................ 119
7.1.28 M027: Drive Life ...................................................................................................... 120
7.1.29 M028: PhaseSeq...................................................................................................... 120
7.1.30 M029: Digital Input State from Terminal Board.......................................................... 120
7.1.31 M030: Digital Input State from Serial Connection ...................................................... 121
7.1.32 M031: Digital Input State from Bus Field ................................................................... 121
4/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
7.2 PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS ..........................................................................................122

7.2.1 P000: Programming Code ............................................................................................122
7.2.2 P001: Autotuning Command .........................................................................................122
7.2.3 P002: Parameter Copy Command.................................................................................123
7.2.4 P003: Programming Level .............................................................................................123
7.2.5 P004: Page Displayed at Power on ................................................................................124
7.2.6 P005: Measure Parameter Display on the KeyPad Page .................................................124
7.2.7 P006: Measure Parameter Selection on the KeyPad Page ...............................................124
7.2.8 P010: Max. Speed.........................................................................................................124
7.2.9 P011: Max. Armature Voltage........................................................................................125
7.2.10 P012: Speed / Voltage Reference Polarity...................................................................125
7.2.11 P013: Max. Positive Speed / Voltage Reference ..........................................................126
7.2.12 P014: Min. Positive Speed / Voltage Reference ...........................................................126
7.2.13 P015: Max. Negative Speed / Voltage Reference ........................................................126
7.2.14 P016: Min. Negative Speed / Voltage Reference.........................................................127
7.2.15 P030: Rise Ramp of the Positive Reference..................................................................127
7.2.16 P031: Fall Ramp of the Positive Reference ..................................................................127
7.2.17 P032: Rise Ramp of the Negative Reference ...............................................................128
7.2.18 P033: Fall Ramp of the Negative Reference................................................................128
7.2.19 P034: Stop Ramp of the Positive Reference .................................................................128
7.2.20 P035: Stop Ramp of the Negative Reference...............................................................129
7.2.21 P036: Rise Ramp of the Jog Reference .......................................................................129
7.2.22 P037: Fall Ramp of the Jog Reference ........................................................................129
7.2.23 P038: Ramp Initial Rounding .....................................................................................130
7.2.24 P039: Ramp Final Rounding ......................................................................................130
7.2.25 P040: Ramp of the Up/Down Internal Reference.........................................................130
7.2.26 P050: Bridge A First Current Limit ..............................................................................130
7.2.27 P051: Bridge B First Current Limit ..............................................................................131
7.2.28 P052: Bridge A Second Current Limit .........................................................................131
7.2.29 P053: Bridge B Second Current Limit .........................................................................131
7.2.30 P054: First to Second Current Limit Speed..................................................................132
7.2.31 P055: Hyperbolic Pattern End Current Limit................................................................132
7.2.32 P056: Hyperbolic Limit Start Speed ............................................................................132
7.2.33 P057: Hyperbolic Limit End Speed .............................................................................132
7.2.34 P058: Current Limit Decrease Per Cent ......................................................................133
7.2.35 P059: Ramp Over the Current Reference....................................................................133
7.2.36 P060: Bridge A Current Overlimit ..............................................................................133
7.2.37 P061: Bridge B Current Overlimit ..............................................................................134
7.2.38 P062: Overlimit Digital Output Delay.........................................................................134
7.2.39 P070(076): Speed Loop Proportional Gain (Second Gain) ..........................................134
7.2.40 P071(077): Speed Loop Integral Time (Second Time)..................................................135
7.2.41 P073(079): Speed Loop Adapted Proportional Gain (Second Gain) .............................135
7.2.42 P074(080): Speed Loop Adapted Integral Time (Second Time) ....................................135
7.2.43 P082: Speed Parameter Auto Adaptation ...................................................................136
7.2.44 P083: First Speed Error for Auto Adaptation ...............................................................136
7.2.45 P084: Second Speed Error for Auto Adaptation ..........................................................136
7.2.46 P085: Speed Integral Time Increment During Ramp....................................................137
7.2.47 P086: Armature Compensation .................................................................................137
7.2.48 P087: Offset over the Speed Error .............................................................................137
7.2.49 P088: Armature Resistive Drop ..................................................................................137
7.2.50 P100: Current Loop Proportional Gain.......................................................................138
7.2.51 P101: Current Loop Integral Time with Discontinuous Current Conduction...................138
7.2.52 P102: Current Loop Integral Time with Continuous Current Conduction ......................138
7.2.53 P103: Armature Equivalent Resistive Drop ..................................................................139
7.2.54 P104: Armature Equivalent Inductive Drop .................................................................139
7.2.55 P110: Field Regulator Voltage Loop Proportional Gain ...............................................139
7.2.56 P111: Field Regulator Voltage Loop Integral Time.......................................................139
5/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
7.2.57 P120: Speed / Voltage Main Input Polarity ................................................................ 140

7.2.58 P121: Speed / Voltage Main Input Bias ..................................................................... 140
7.2.59 P122: Speed / Voltage Main Input Gain.................................................................... 140
7.2.60 P123: Main Current Input Polarity ............................................................................. 141
7.2.61 P124: Current Main Input Bias.................................................................................. 141
7.2.62 P125: Current Main Input Gain ................................................................................ 141
7.2.63 P126(129)(132): Polarity for Auxiliary Analog Input 1(2)(3 ......................................... 142
7.2.64 P127(130)(133): Auxiliary Analog Input 1(2)(3) Bias .................................................. 142
7.2.65 P128(131)(134): Auxiliary Analog Input 1(2)(3) Gain ................................................. 142
7.2.66 P150(153): Analog Output 1(2) Configuration .......................................................... 143
7.2.67 P151(154): Analog Output 1(2) Bias ......................................................................... 144
7.2.68 P152(155): Analog Output 1(2) Gain........................................................................ 144
7.2.69 P156: Analog IOut Polarity on Terminal 6 ................................................................. 144
7.2.70 P157(158): Analog output polarity 1(2) ..................................................................... 145
7.2.71 P170(176)(182)(188)(194): Digital Output 1(2)(3)(4)(5) Configuration ....................... 146
7.2.72 P171(177)(183)(189)(195): Digital Output 1(2)(3)(4)(5) On Delay.............................. 147
7.2.73 P172(178)(184)(190)(196): Digital Output 1(2)(3)(4)(5) Off Delay.............................. 147
7.2.74 P173(179)(185)(191)(197): Digital Output 1(2)(3)(4)(5) Switching Level...................... 148
7.2.75 P174(180)(186)(192)(198): Digital Output 1(2)(3)(4)(5) Switching Hysteresis............... 149
7.2.76 P175(181)(187)(193)(199): Digital Output 1(2)(3)(4)(5) Contact Logic........................ 149
7.2.77 P211(212)(213)(214)(215)(216)(217): Preset Run Reference 1(2)(3)(4)(5)(6)(7 ............ 150
7.2.78 P221: Jog Ramp Selection ........................................................................................ 151
7.2.79 Jog Reference 1(2)(3) ............................................................................................... 151
7.2.80 P230: Min. Firing Angle............................................................................................ 152
7.2.81 P231: Max. Firing Angle........................................................................................... 152
7.2.82 P240: Low Pass Filter over the Speed / Voltage Error ................................................. 152
7.2.83 P250: Up / Down Internal Reference Polarity ............................................................. 152
7.2.84 P251: Up / Down Internal Reference Restoration at Power On.................................... 152
7.3 CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS....................................................................................... 153
7.3.1 C000: Motor Rated Current .......................................................................................... 153
7.3.2 C001: Current for Motor Thermal Protection ................................................................. 153
7.3.3 C002: Time Constant for Motor Thermal Protection ....................................................... 153
7.3.4 C010: Motor Field Rated Current .................................................................................. 154
7.3.5 C011: Field Weakening Start Rated Speed .................................................................... 154
7.3.6 C012: Rated Armature Voltage at Field Weakening ....................................................... 154
7.3.7 C014: Standstill Field Current ....................................................................................... 155
7.3.8 C015: Standstill Field Current Decrease Delay............................................................... 155
7.3.9 C016: Field Weakening Min. Current............................................................................ 155
7.3.10 C017: Boost over the Field Current ........................................................................... 156
7.3.11 C018: Boost Duration on Field Current ..................................................................... 156
7.3.12 C030: Nominal Mains Voltage ................................................................................. 156
7.3.13 C050: Speed / Voltage Loop Operation.................................................................... 157
7.3.14 C051: Current Loop Operation ................................................................................ 157
7.3.15 C052: Field Regulator Voltage Loop Operation ......................................................... 157
7.3.16 C060: First Quadrant Selection................................................................................. 158
7.3.17 C061: Second Quadrant Selection............................................................................ 158
7.3.18 C062: Third Quadrant Selection ............................................................................... 158
7.3.19 C063: Fourth Quadrant Selection ............................................................................. 158
7.3.20 C070: Feedback Selection ........................................................................................ 159
7.3.21 C072: Encoder Pulses/Rev........................................................................................ 159
7.3.22 C074: Tacho Transduction Ratio ............................................................................... 159
7.3.23 C090: AlarmAutoReset Number................................................................................ 160
7.3.24 C091: ResetTime of AutoresetNumber....................................................................... 160
7.3.25 C092: PowerOnReset ............................................................................................... 160
7.3.26 C093: Autoreset after Mains Failure.......................................................................... 160
7.3.27 C094: StartSafety..................................................................................................... 161
7.3.28 C100: LOCAL / MIXED Selection Enabling ................................................................ 161
6/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
7.3.29 C101: Delay from Starting Enabling ..........................................................................161

7.3.30 C102: ZeroingTime ..................................................................................................162
7.3.31 C103: Emergency Stop .............................................................................................162
7.3.32 C105(106)(107)(108): Source Reference Selection 1(2)(3)(4) ......................................163
7.3.33 C110(111)(112): Command Source Selection 1(2)(3) .................................................164
7.3.34 C120(121)(122): Analog Input 1(2)(3) Configuration .................................................165
7.3.35 C130(131)(132)(133)(134)(135): Digital Input 1(2)(3)(4)(5)(6) Configuration ..............167
7.3.36 C141: Alarm A016/017 Trip Delay ...........................................................................169
7.3.37 C142: Alarm A027 Trip Delay...................................................................................170
7.3.38 C143: Alarm A028 Trip Delay...................................................................................170
7.3.39 C150: Alarm A001 Trip Disabling .............................................................................170
7.3.43 C155: Alarm A008 Trip Management........................................................................171
7.3.45 C157: Alarm A016/017 Trip Disabling......................................................................171
7.3.48 C160: Serial Connection Drive Address .....................................................................172
7.3.49 C161: Serial Connection Transmission Speed ............................................................172
7.3.50 C162: Serial Connection Parity Control......................................................................172
7.3.51 C163: Master Data Area Base Address ......................................................................173
7.3.52 C164: Serial Time Out ..............................................................................................173
7.3.53 C165: Serial Response Delay ....................................................................................173
7.3.54 C170: Load Type......................................................................................................173
8 DIAGNOSTICS..........................................................................................................................174
8.1 ALARM PARAMETERS .........................................................................................................174
8.1.1 A001: Field Current Failure ...........................................................................................175
8.1.2 A002: Heatsink Overtemperature ..................................................................................175
8.1.3 A003: Armature Overcurrent .........................................................................................175
8.1.4 A004: Load Loss ...........................................................................................................175
8.1.5 A006: Unstable Mains Frequency ..................................................................................175
8.1.6 A007: Mains Phase Failure............................................................................................176
8.1.7 A008: Speed Feedback Failure ......................................................................................176
8.1.8 A009: Field Overcurrent................................................................................................176
8.1.9 A010: Armature Overvoltage ........................................................................................176
8.1.10 A011: Auto Tuning Inductance out of Range ..............................................................176
8.1.11 A012: Mains Frequency out of Range ........................................................................176
8.1.12 A013: Synchronization Failure ...................................................................................177
8.1.13 A014: AutoTuning Resistance out of Range ................................................................177
8.1.14 A015: Torque During Current AutoTuning..................................................................177
8.1.15 A016: Mains Overvoltage .........................................................................................177
8.1.16 A017: Mains Undervoltage........................................................................................177
8.1.17 A018: AutoTuning Interrupted ...................................................................................178
8.1.18 A019: Limitation During Speed AutoTuning................................................................178
8.1.19 A020: ExternalAlarm 1..............................................................................................178
8.1.20 A021: Motor Thermal Protection Trip .........................................................................178
8.1.21 A022: Drive Thermal Protection Trip ..........................................................................178
8.1.22 A023: Field Weakening Min. Current Limit.................................................................178
8.1.23 A024: EEPROM Missing or Blank ...............................................................................179
8.1.24 A025: Wrong Parameters in EEPROM Work Area .......................................................179
8.1.25 A026: EEPROM Wrong Backup Parameters ................................................................179
8.1.26 A027: Serial Communication Failure .........................................................................179
8.1.27 A028: Connection with Field Bus Failure ....................................................................179
8.1.28 A029: External Alarm 2.............................................................................................180
8.1.29 A030: External Alarm 3.............................................................................................180
7/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
8.1.30 A031: EEPROM Work Area Internal Data Altered....................................................... 180

8.1.31 A032: Microcontroller Reset...................................................................................... 180
8.1.32 A033: Unknown Failure ........................................................................................... 180
8.1.33 Additional Alarms .................................................................................................... 180
8.2 WARNING PARAMETERS................................................................................................... 181
8.2.1 W002: Speed Feedback Loss ........................................................................................ 181
8.2.2 W003: Hardware Limit Current not at Maximum Value ................................................. 181
8.2.3 W004: Safe Restart after an Alarm Reset ....................................................................... 181
8.2.4 W005: Restart after an Emergency Stop from Keypad .................................................... 181
8.2.5 W006: Backup Values Stored in RAM ............................................................................ 182
8.2.6 W007: Default Values Stored in RAM ............................................................................ 182
8.2.7 W008: Wrong parameters in EEPROM Work Area ......................................................... 182
8.2.8 W009: Wrong Parameters in EEPROM Backup Area ...................................................... 182
9 EMC CHARACTERISTICS AND INPUT FILTER.............................................................................. 183
10 USERS PARAMETERS DIFFERENT FROM DEFAULT VALUES......................................................... 186
8/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
1 DELIVERY CHECK
When receiving the unit, check that no damage is visible and its compliance with your requirements. To do
that, refer to the plate (see following figure) located on the converter front side. If the unit is damaged,
contact the insurance company or the supplier.
If the unit is stored before it is used, check that the storage area conditions are acceptable (temperatures
ranging from -20C and +60C, relative humidity lower than 95% and no dew).
The warranty covers any manufacturing faults. The manufacturer has no responsibility for damages
occurred during transportation or unpacking.
In no case and in no circumstances, the manufacturer will be responsible for damages or failures due to
wrong usage, abuse, wrong installation or incorrect temperature, humidity or corrosive materials, as well
as for faults caused by operation exceeding the rated values. The manufacturer will not be responsible for
consequential or accidental damages.
The manufacturer provides a 12-month warranty, starting from the delivery date.
- ELETTRONICA SANTERNO S.p.A. - - MADE IN ITALY -

1
TYPE DCREG4.350 Digital AC/DC DRIVE
Circuit (B6)A(B6)C 2
ZZ0061035.35NUU
3
INPUT Control AC2PH 380..500Vac (or 24Vdc)
ARMATURE AC3PH 500Vac max 50/60Hz 287A 4
FIELD AC2PH 200..500Vac 50/60Hz 15A
OUTPUT ARMATURE 520Vdc max 350A (+150%) 5
FIELD 0..425Vdc 15A
6
8
KEY
1. The device is called DCREG4.350. It is an AC/DC digital-operated drive.

2. The acronym identifies the configuration consisting of two full-control three-phase bridges in
antiparallel forming the drive power section.
3. The device main code and size code are detailed before and after a full stop respectively
(ELETTRONICA SANTERNO codes).
4. The control section may be supplied either with 380 500Vac single-phase alternate voltage or with
a 24Vdc direct voltage (considering, of course, a different terminal pair).
5. The armature section can be supplied with a 500Vac (max.) three-phase alternate voltage and
according to a 50/60Hz frequency value, thus absorbing at rated load a three-phase alternate current
equal to 287A.
6. The field section may be supplied with a single-phase alternate voltage equal to 200 500Vac and
according to a 50/60Hz frequency value, thus absorbing at rated load an alternate current equal to 15A.
7. The device is able to supply 520Vdc (max.) on the armature output, with continuous supply of 350A
(with a maximum overload of 150% of the nominal value at a preset duty-cycle).
8. The device is able to supply 425Vdc (max.) on the field output, with a continuous supply of 15A.
Any DCREG manufactured starting from the second half of 2008 is equipped
NOTE
with one ES906 control board instead of ES800 + ES801 control boards.
9/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
2 START-UP
2.1 INTRODUCTION
This section describes the main checks and operations which should be carried out to achieve an excellent
adjusting of the DCREG drive.
All information contained herein is directed to the Users being already familiar with the use of the keypad.
If need be, refer to the KEYPAD AND ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY section for further information.
For a clearer drive operation, the drive operating mode is supposed to send references and control
sequence to inputs by means of the terminal board.
This section has to be considered as a simple and useful guide aimed at achieving a proper adjusting of
the device. It covers both the regulations regarding the most common applications and the setting up of
more specific configurations.
For further information about the function of the different hardware terminals or software parameters and
any additional details, refer to the specific sections of the manual.
In particular, it is strongly recommended to refer to the POWER CONNECTIONS and SIGNAL
CONNECTIONS sections for a correct use of the hardware terminals, as well as the BLOCK DIAGRAM and
the PARAMETER LIST section for a proper setting of the software parameters.
2.2 PRELIMINARY CHECKS

2.2.1 When installing the equipment, carefully read the information given on the stick-on plate fitted on
the front panel and make sure that the supply voltage value required to supply the power section at bars
L1-2-3 does not exceed the maximum value advised (standard value: 440Vac for DCREG2 and DCREG4).
Check also that the supply voltage for the field regulator on terminals E1-2 and for the control section on
terminals 53-54 is included within the suggested range.
Of course, the latter requirement shall not be necessary whenever the user is going to supply the control
section with a 24Vdc direct voltage on terminals 40-42. This is always possible even without making any
hardware modification.
The standard equipment may be supplied on terminals 53-54 (control section)

with a single-phase alternate voltage between 380 500Vac. On demand,
the device may be supplied on terminals 53-54 a with single-phase alternate
voltage between 200 240Vac.
NOTE
The standard equipment may be supplied through terminals E1-2 (field
regulator) with a single-phase voltage ranging from 200 to 500Vac. For drives
assembled till 30th June 2006 only, in order to supply terminals E1-2 with a
single-phase alternate voltage ranging from 200 to 240Vac, just enable
jumper J1 on field regulator board ES734 in position 230 ON.
2.2.2 Check also that the device is not oversized compared to the motor rated current. That means that
the motor current value should not be lower than the 75% of the device rated current.
2.2.3 Carefully inspection the wiring by referring to the POWER CONNECTIONS and SIGNAL
CONNECTIONS sections of this manual. In particular, make sure that a NO auxiliary contact of the KM
contactor has been connected in series with the ENABLE contact on terminal 24.
2.2.4 Connect the shield of the screened cables relating to the analog signals to the ground potential as
directly as possible. Use the three collar-shaped cable fasteners situated on the bottom of the control board
supporting guard.
10/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
2.3 MAIN CHECKS AND CONFIGURATIONS

2.3.1 Supply the control section and the field regulator of the device (except the power section). The four
LEDs which can be seen through the small rectangular slot on the cover should be off.
Whenever the display shows an alarm condition, it is necessary to reset it by

simultaneously pressing the PROG and SAVE keys on the front keypad, or
by means of one of the configurable digital inputs, by programming
NOTE parameters C130(131)(132)(133)(134)(135) at the 0:Reset value (this
configuration is a default value on MDI1, terminal 28). Should the alarm not
disappear from the display (and therefore the alarm cause persists), refer to the
ALARM PARAMETERS section of the manual.
Before changing the above mentioned parameters and any other parameter,
NOTE
set the value of parameter P000 to 1.
Any other setting up procedure described below should always be saved on the
NOTE EEPROM. The non-observance of said instruction shall produce the loss of all
data while turning off the device.
The programming level is set in parameter P003; its default value is called
0:Basic. This parameter allows to access and modify few other parameters
NOTE only, as it is used for a quick and simple starting. If during the start-up
procedure some parameters which are not included in said programming level
must be changed, set parameter P003 to 1:Advanced.
2.3.2 When no alarm condition is stored, the display generally keeps on showing the Status page, unless
the KeyPad page has been programmed through parameter P004 (FirstPage). When no alarm condition is
stored, the Status page displays the Drive OK message, the software version which has been installed, the
drive type, the drive size and the max. supply voltage that may be applied to the power section. Otherwise,
the Alarms and Warnings are displayed on this page.
Here follows an example of such displaying messages.
Drive OK D4.01
DCREG4.100 P440
By the example stated above, we understand that no alarm conditions are detected, that the installed
software version is D4.01, and that the device is a DCREG4 with continuous output current equal to 100A
and a maximum three-phase voltage applicable to the power section equal to 440V.
The displaying of warning message W003 (Imax[T2] <100%) means that it is

necessary to turn the T2 trimmer completely clockwise, since a partial rotation
clockwise could result in a disagreement between the current limit and the
armature maximum current values to be obtained. More precisely, the
NOTE
armature maximum current value could be lower than the one required.
The trimmer is located on the right side of the ES800 (ES906) board, near the
two seven-segment displays which can be seen through the small slot on the
drive cover.
2.3.3 Check the correct operation of the air-cooling unit (if any). Air blowing should be generated from
the bottom to the top.
11/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
2.3.4 The device is already supplying the motor field winding, according to the economy function (Field
Economy) set in par. C014.
On parameter C010 (default value: 10%), set the field rated current percentage of the motor with respect
to the field rated current of the drive. The standard values of the drive field rated current are 5A for
DCREG.100max.,15A for DCREG.150min Size 1 and 35A for DCREG Size 2(A) and MODULAR.S.
If need be, you can also change the standstill field current on parameter C014 (default value: 10% of
C010) and the field decrease delay on parameter C015 (default value: 240s).
If a boost on the field current is to be set at the device starting, adjust the value of parameter C017
(default value: 100%) and parameter C018 (default value: 10s) accordingly by enabling the function
through one of the configurable digital inputs; set parameters C130(131)(132)(133)(134)(135) to the
11:FldFrcEnabled value. This, however, could have no effect if the field current increase does not produce
any remarkable field flux increase, thus limiting this function application.
2.3.5 If a dynamic regulation of the field current in field weakening mode is required - with a speed
feedback different than the armature feedback - besides programming par. C010 and C014, program the
motor armature nominal voltage in par. C012 (default value: 1000V), the value per cent of the field
weakening start max. speed in par. C011 (default value: 33%) and the limit at the field current min. value
in par. C016 (default value: 25% of C010).
As stated in the FIELD REGULATOR chapter, set the last value at approx. 75% of the min. motor rated field
current corresponding to its max. speed.
2.3.6 Make sure that the rated value of the power section supply voltage corresponds to the indications
stated in parameter C030 (default value: 400V): if necessary, change the value.
2.3.7 Access parameter C000 (default value: 100%) and set the percentage value of the armature rated
current of the motor with respect to the armature rated current of the drive.
If need be, also set a proper thermal constant on parameter C002 (default value: 300 s) by following the
general indications described in the chapter of this manual dealing with that parameter.
2.3.8 Choose the operating mode of the current loop through parameter C051 (default value: PI). It is
advised to leave the default selection of C051 at value 0:PI Operating in most cases, and to set C051
selection at value 1:Predictive=>J1 only when a very quick response is demanded with a DCREG4 in
encoder or tacho feedback mode, unless the load inertial torque is much lower than the resisting torque.
2.3.9 When choosing the second mode (predictive algorithm), set jumper J1 from position 1 to position
0. Jumper J1 is located on board ES729/1 (installed inside the equipment on control board ES728/2), then
perform current autotune and set parameter P001 to value 1:Current and follow the instructions displayed
(see also the AUTOMATIC TUNING section). By contrast, if the first modality (PI regulator) is chosen, go on
with the next step of this Procedure.
2.3.10 Access parameter C070 (default value: Tacho feedback: 80 250V) and make sure that the
speed feedback type which has been set corresponds to the one required.
2.3.11 Should the feedback be generated from a tacho, check the value set on C070 (among values 0-1-
2), which should match the terminal being used to receive the signal from the tacho.
Then, if the tacho transduction ratio set on parameter C074 (default value: 60V / 1000 RPM) is correct, set
the speed concerning the maximum reference in parameter P010 (default value: 2500RPM) in r.p.m.
Any value being set for parameters C074 and P010 should be programmed in
such a way that product C074P010 does not exceed 25V if C070 = 0, 80V
NOTE
if C070 = 1, 250V if C070 = 2. Otherwise, this will cause drive speed
control failure.
12/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
2.3.12 Should the feedback be generated from an encoder, check that the transduction ratio of the
supplied signal, which has been set on parameter C072 (default value: 1024 pulses/rev) is correct. If
necessary, change it accordingly.
The speed concerning the maximum reference (expressed in r.p.m.) should always be set on parameter
P010 (default value: 2500RPM).
Any value being set in parameters C072 and P010 should be programmed in
such a way that product C072P010 does not exceed 102.400kHz (value
obtained from an encoder supplying 1024 pulse/rev that can rotate at a speed
NOTE
1024 6000
of max. 6000 RPM: 102400 = ), in order to avoid possible speed
60
control faults caused by the drive.
2.3.13 Should the feedback be generated from an armature, set on parameter P011 (default value: 400V
for DCREG4, 460V for DCREG2) the armature voltage corresponding to the maximum value (in Volt).
2.3.14 Except for a DCREG2 model, a DCREG4 model with an armature feedback or whenever the load
inertial moment is largely variable (e.g. in a coiler), the speed automatic tuning may be performed at that
moment. Set parameter P001 to value 2:Speed and follow the instructions displayed (see also the
AUTOMATIC TUNING section).
2.3.15 Now RxI armature resistive drop autotuning is to be done by setting par. P001 to 3:RxI and
following the instructions displayed (see also AUTOMATIC TUNING chapter). On the other hand, if the
autotuning function is not performed and par. P088 is left at its default value (0V), the drive will not be able
to process the back-electromotive force and to display it in par. M007 (BEMF) and it will not be able to
keep the BEMF constant during the dynamic adjustment of the field current in field weakening mode or in
armature feedback stage (by means of the compensation function to be done through parameter P86, with
a value defined as a percentage of par. P088 value).
2.4 SPEED CONTROL MODE OPERATION

2.4.1 The previous section MAIN CHECKS AND CONFIGURATIONS has already covered the
programming procedure of the speed corresponding to the maximum reference, as far as the three main
types of speed feedback (tacho, encoder, armature) are concerned.
As for the analog inputs, main input REF between terminals 5 and 7 is generally used (in common mode,
in differential mode, or by sending a 0(4) 20mA reference after adjusting jumper JP7 of board ES801
(JP407 in ES906) in pos. 2-3). The ramp function may be applied to said input.
Alternatively, it is possible to use input IN 1 between terminals 11 and 13 (in common mode, in differential
mode, or by sending a 0(4) 20mA reference after adjusting jumper JP8 of board ES801(JP408 in
ES906) in pos. 2-3).
You can finally use input IN 2 between terminal 17 and 0V or input IN 3 between terminal 19 and 0V.
Whenever a (0)4 20mA reference is to be used, refer to the chapter dealing

NOTE with MILLIAMPERE INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS to know the value to be
programmed in the parameters relating to the Gain and Bias operators.
13/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
Make sure that, at maximum speed and maximum voltage, the output armature
ATTENTION
voltage does not exceed the motor rated value.
The operation stability is generally more critical when the speed maximum
value being set according to the maximum reference decreases. In order to set
maximum speed values being especially low, it is therefore recommended to
NOTE
reduce the reference amplification through the Gain function relating to the
selected analog input (see the SPEED CONTROL OPTIONS chapter), instead of
adjusting the feedback.
2.4.2 The value of the reference for the jog run (jog) may be chosen among the three values set on
parameters P222 P224 (default values: +5 %,-5 % and 0 % respectively), while the set value should be
selected via a combination of two MDIx configurable digital inputs (max.) by programming parameters
C130(131)(132)(133)(134)(135) at values 12:JogA and 13:JogB (these configurations are both default
values on MDI2 on terminal 30 and on MDI3 on terminal 32 respectively: see the table reported in the
chapter dealing with parameters P222 P224).
2.5 RAMP CONFIGURATION IN SPEED CONTROL MODE

2.5.1 The reference applied to the ramps will be indicated in the following chapters of this Manual (and in the
BLOCK DIAGRAM) as Ref n. For this Ref n, some ramp times may be programmed; set the value on par. P030
P035 (default values: 0s) or set the roundings through par. P038 and P039 (default values: 0s).
Between ramp times and rounding times, a certain ratio of inequality should be
NOTE
proved. Said value is reported in the note in chapter RAMPS OVER REFERENCE.
2.5.2 On the other hand, the jog run ramps are indicated by parameter P221 (by default, they have also
been applied to the Ref n reference) and, depending on the parameter setting, may also be indicated by
parameters P030 P035 (default values: 0s) or by parameter P036 and parameter P037 (default values:
0s).
2.5.3 The ramp and rounding times, indicated by parameters P030 P035, P038, P039, may also be
changed in continuous mode from the outside, through one of the configurable analog inputs. To do that,
set parameters C120(121)(122) to one of values 3:Ramps reduct. 7:tDN-reduction, otherwise they may
be set to zero through one of the MDIx configurable digital inputs by programming parameters
C130(131)(132)(133)(134)(135) to 7:Ramps Disabled..
2.5.4 In case of medium-duration ramps, set the integral time automatic increase during ramp through
par. P085 (disabled by default).
2.6 SPEED CONTROL OPTIONS

2.6.1 The signal entering analog inputs REF, IN1, IN2, IN3 may be set with the following operators: Gain
(with parameter P122, parameter P128, parameter P131 and parameter P134 respectively, default
values: 100%), Bias (with parameter P121, parameter P127, parameter P130 and parameter P133
respectively, default values: 0%) and Polarity (with parameter P120, parameter P126, parameter P129
and parameter P132 respectively, default values: Bipolar). All these four inputs may be assigned to the
Reverse operator (by means of programmable digital inputs MDIx, by setting parameter
C130(131)(132)(133)(134)(135) at 5:Reverse. This is the default configuration for MDI6 on terminal 38).
If the LOC SEQ LED is on or flashing, polarity may also be reversed by pressing the REVERSE key.
The internal reference, resulting from the application of the operators above, is displayed by par. M014,
M010, M011 and M012 respectively.
14/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
2.6.2 In order to obtain the Ref n reference applied to the ramps, it is possible to choose one of the
preset run references (up to a maximum of seven) preset in parameters
P211(212)(213)(214)(215)(216)(217) (default values: +5 %, + 20%, +10 %, 0 %, -5 %, -20 %, -10 %
respectively). To do so, select the reference concerned with a combination of max. three MDIx configurable
digital inputs, by programming parameters C130(131)(132)(133)(134)(135) at values 1:Preset Speed A,
2:Preset Speed B and 3:Preset Speed C (see the table contained in the chapter dealing with parameters
P211 P217: the 1:Preset Speed A function is programmed by default on MDI4, terminal 34). The above
mentioned Reverse function may be applied to these preset running references too. By introducing a preset
running reference, the START contact closing is always required.
2.6.3 For the Ref n speed reference applied to the ramps, the user may select the allowable polarity
through par. P012 (default value: Bipolar). For said reference, the maximum value may also be defined
through parameter P013 and parameter P015 (default values: +100% and -100% respectively). This limit
is also valid for the n setpoint global reference. After programming a polarity of one sign only on
parameter P012, a minimum speed value is given both for the Ref n reference applied to the ramps and
for n setpoint global speed reference through p. P014 and p. P016 (default values: 0%). Anyway, disabling
of minimum speed can be achieved by closing one of the MDIx configurable digital inputs, once
parameters C130(131)(132)(133)(134)(135) have been programmed at value 9:MinSpdDisabled.
2.6.4 In case of tacho or encoder feedback, and in the event of a feedback signal failure, it is possible to
set the automatic switching towards the armature feedback through par. C155 (default value: Alarm
enabled).
If the dynamic regulation of the field current in field weakening mode is enabled, par. P011 (default value
400 V) is to be set at the same value as par. C012 in order to keep the speed of rotation nearly constant in
case of feedback failure.
2.6.5 In case of armature feedback, the RxI drop compensation may be entered through par. P086
(default value: 100%) whose value represents the value per cent of par. P088 computed by the autotuning
function. The autotuning function may be enabled by setting par. P001 to 3:RxI.
2.6.6 Should the motor tend to turn slowly with a zero reference, i.e. when a speed error offset is
detected, it is possible to stop the motor by adjusting parameter P087 (default value: 0%).
2.6.7 A limitation of the firing angle value may be obtained both in the energy transfer towards the load
and in the energy regeneration towards the mains. Set parameter P230 (default value: 30 for DCREG4
and 25 for DCREG2) and parameter P231 (default value: 150) respectively.
2.6.8 To avoid possible speed overshoots due to quick variations of reference at constant load (drive in
current limit mode), or to avoid temporary speed losses in case of quick variations of load at constant
reference, it may be advisable to introduce the parameter auto adaptation (this function has been disabled
by default) through parameter P082 and any other related parameter. Refer to the SPEED PARAMETER
AUTOADAPTATION chapter to know the different programming procedures required.
2.7 CURRENT (TORQUE) CONTROL MODE OPERATION

2.7.1 A current control (torque) is generally required when tension controls are performed on a winding
or unwinding material or while controlling any machine integral to another from a mechanical point of
view. In fact, said conditions require a proper torque distribution.
2.7.2 In the first event, a simple external regulation of the current limit is generally requested by using
one of the configurable analog inputs; set parameters C120(121)(122) to one of values 8:Ext. curr.lim. ...
10:BrdgB ext.lim. The polarity of the used signal may be selected on par. P126(129)(132) (default value:
Bipolar).
15/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
For this operating mode, the speed reference should allow to keep the drive in
NOTE
current limit condition at any time.
2.7.3 In the second case, a direct setting of the current reference is generally performed. To use the REF
main input between terminals 5 and 7 it is then possible to program parameter C050 as 3:Iref=Vref
(default value: PI operating) whenever a permanent configuration is required. Otherwise, it could be
advisable to close one of the MDIx configurable digital inputs by programming parameters
C130(131)(132)(133)(134)(135) at value 6:Slave Enabled whenever the current reference setting is to
performed only through an external command enabling.
A current reference setting may be performed on any REF, IN1, IN2, IN3
analog inputs, after programming them accordingly.
In particular, if the REF main input between terminals 5 and 7 is to be used, the
Gain, Bias and Polarity operators use distinct parameters (i.e. different from
the parameters enabled in case of voltage / speed reference). In particular, the
Gain function is programmed in parameter P125(default value: 100%), the
Bias function is programmed in parameter P124 (default value: 0%), while the
NOTE
Polarity function is programmed in parameter P123 (default value: Bipolar).
By contrast, if auxiliary analog input IN 1(2)(3) is to be used, parameter
C120(121)(122) is to be set at value 2:I loop add. ref. In addition, main
reference REF is to become a current reference, either permanently by
programming parameter C050 at value 3:Iref=Vref or temporarily by closing
a digital input set at value 6:Slave Enabled. For each of those two modes, main
input REF is to be connected to zero volt.
For a drive couple operating in MASTER / SLAVE mode, the current reference
to be supplied by the master drive may be obtained on terminal 8(10) by
programming P150(153) = 4:Current ref. As the reference standard level
NOTE supplied by the MASTER drive is 5V at its rated current (M003 = 100%), if also
the SLAVE drive must supply its rated current - with said reference at REF main
reference between terminals 5 and 7 - gain P125 (IrefGain) is to be set at
200%.
2.8 CURRENT LIMIT CONTROL OPTIONS

2.8.1 In the speed and current control, the current internal limitation remains always activated. It is
generally set as single-value adjusting through parameter P050 and parameter P051 (default values:
100%) and always represents a percentage of the armature current rated value indicated by parameter
C000 (default value: 100%).
So, whenever a double-value adjusting is required, it is necessary to set also parameter P052 and
parameter P053 (default values: 100%) by fixing the switching speed threshold with parameter P054
(default value: 100%).
If an hyperbolic adjusting is to be programmed, set parameter P055, parameter P056 and parameter
P057 (default values: 100%).
16/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
2.8.2 A current overlimit (i.e. a permanent increase of the current limit) is available in case of heavy
torque demands. The limit overcurrent value may be programmed through par. P060 and P061 (default
value: 100%). If the current required is inconsistent with the max. allowable duty-cycle (150% of the
nominal current for 1min every 10min), alarm A022 will trip (Drive It Trip).
2.8.3 On the other hand, to achieve a current limit decrease through an external command, it is
necessary to close one of the MDIx configurable digital inputs by programming parameters
C130(131)(132)(133)(134)(135) at value 4:Clim (said configuration is set by default on MDI5, terminal
36), after setting the limit decrease value on parameter P058 (default value: 50%).
2.8.4 To enable or disable one or more work quadrants of the torque / speed plan, set parameter
C160 C163 (default values: 1st and 2 nd quadrant enabled for DCREG2 (from SW Vers. D4.01), and 1st
4th quadrant enabled for DCREG4).
2.9 ANALOG AND DIGITAL OUTPUTS

2.9.1 The configurable analog outputs OUT1 and OUT2 are available on terminals 8 and 10. Their
meaning is indicated by parameters P150 and P153 respectively (default value: 0V). Any analog output
OUT1, OUT2 may include Gain operator (with parameter P152 and parameter P155 respectively; default
values: 100%), Bias operator (with parameter P151 and parameter P154 respectively; default values: 0%),
and Polarity operator (with parameter P157 and parameter P158 respectively; default values: Bipolar).
By moving jumpers JP9 and/or JP10 from pos. 1-2 (standard) to pos. 2-3, said analog outputs turn to 0
20mA current outputs respectively (outgoing current only: for the value to be set in the parameters relating
to Gain and Bias operators, see MILLIAMPERE INPUT / OUTPUT SIGNALS chapter).
2.9.2 The two non-configurable analog outputs have been already defined: n OUT on terminal 4 and I
OUT on terminal 6. The latter may be defined as polarity of the output signal through parameter P156
(default value: Bipolar for DCREG4, and Positive Only for DCREG2).
2.9.3 There are five MDOx configurable digital outputs. They are available on terminals 25-27, 29-31,
33-35, 37-39 and 41-43, and are defined by parameters P170(176)(182)(188)(194). The MDOx
configurable digital outputs may include functions On Delay (with parameters P171(177)(183)(189)(195)
respectively and default values: 0s), Off Delay (with parameters P172(178)(184)(190)(196) respectively
and default values: 0s), Level (with parameters P173(179)(185)(191)(197) respectively and default values:
50%, 3%, 50%, 5%, 50%), Hysteresis (with parameters P174(180)(186)(192)(198) respectively and default
values: 2%) and Logic (with parameters P175(181)(187)(193)(199) respectively and default values:
Normally Open).
2.10 BACKUP AND RESTORATION OF STORED PARAMETERS

2.10.1 After starting the device and checking its correct settings, it is recommended that the user writes
down the parameters that have been changed (and stored) with respect to their default values. To do so,
use the special table specified on the last pages of the OPERATION MANUAL, in chapter USERS
PARAMETERS CHANGED WITH RESPECT TO DEFAULT VALUES. If you set par. P000 to 2:Modified Parms
and if you scroll all other parameters using the arrow keys, the display will show only those parameters
having a current value different than the default value.
2.10.2 A backup of the stored parameters is recommended. If need be, set par. P002 to
2:WorkAreaBackup to enable the backup parameter restoration. To do so, set par. P002 to 3:Backup
Restore.
17/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
3 GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
3.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

APPLICATION The devices of the DCREG series are AC/DC drives with fully digital control
system. They fit the armature and field supply of direct current motors to enable
the speed or torque control. DCREG4 operates in four quadrants, while
DCREG2 operates in two quadrants.
SUPPLY Control section: from 380500Vac single-phase alternate voltage (or

200240Vac on request), tolerance +10/-20% taken directly from the power
supply three-phase voltage, or differing from it, and not necessarily in phase
with it. Alternatively, with a 24Vdc direct voltage, tolerance may be +15/-10%
with no hardware adjustment.
Armature section: from three-phase alternate mains or a 10440Vac
generator unit (by request: 10500Vac or 10690Vac). Tolerance is +10%
on the maximum applicable voltage, or +20% on rated voltage (C030), should
the former tolerance be larger than the latter. Tolerance is -15% over rated
voltage with DCREG4, and -20% over rated voltage with DCREG2. Frequency
is 50/60Hz. Phase sequence insensitiveness of power phases.
Field regulator, from 200500Vac single-phase alternate voltage +10/-20%
(For drives assembled till 30th June 2006 only, for a power supply from 200 to
240Vac, jumper J1 is to be enabled on field regulator board ES734 in position
230 ON). Supply frequency is 50/60 Hz.
AIR-COOLING Natural with vertical airflow up to DCREG.70, forced ventilation from the
DCREG.100 version on. Possibility of THROUGH PANEL assembly for all sizes.
OVERLOAD CAPACITY Current limit increasing capacity up to 150% of the nominal value. The max.
overload cycle determining the alarm protection trip consists of a 150% current
overlimit lasting for 1 minute. It can be performed with a 1:10 duty-cycle.
CONTROL Fully digital with feedback double loop, inner adjustment for the current control
and external adjustment for the voltage / speed control. Equipped with two
micro controllers: one of them is specially designed to perform the current loop
and offers the possibility of choosing between a PI-type regulator or - in case of
a DCREG4 type only - a predictive algorithm to achieve a more dynamic
response. Adaptive speed regulator and automatically variable parameters
according to the speed error. Two sets of regulation parameters available for
the speed loop, referring to two possible different situations of the motor (i.e.
the mechanical time constant, the reduction ratio, the inertial moment, etc.).
SPEED REACTION From tacho, encoder, or armature feedback. Possibility of automatically

switching to the armature feedback in case of failures.
18/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
OPERATING FEATURES DCREG4: operation and total reversibility in the four quadrants: may operate
as a motor or a brake towards both directions of rotation. Speed or torque
control system.
DCREG2: operation as motor in the 1st quadrant with speed or torque control
system. May operate as a brake in the 2nd quadrant with speed or torque
control system.
In both drive versions, each quadrant may be enabled or disabled
independently. Possibility of operation with constant available maximum torque
/ power through an internal field regulator.
AUTOMATIC TUNING The drive acknowledges the main characteristics of the motor and load to
automatically calculate the most convenient parameters to be introduced in the
speed and current loops.
SERIAL INTERFACE It may be supplied with a MODBUS protocol according to RS232-C standard
and RS485 standard. For more details, please contact Elettronica Santerno and
ask for PC-DCREG INTERFACING VIA MODBUS (code 16B0301B3).
FIELDBUS ProfiBus-DP available. By request, InterBus, DeviceNet, ControlNet, CANopen

are available.
The following items may be set at DCREG input:
a) START and ENABLE digital inputs and six programmable digital inputs.
b) Speed / voltage reference or current reference.
Finally, DCREG may duplicate - by means of its programmable analog or
digital outputs - the input signals sent by the field bus, and resend those signals
to the bus field for the analog or digital inputs.
For more information, please ask for PC-DCREG INTERFACING VIA
PROFIBUS-DP (code 16B0221B3).
ACCURACY 0.1% of rated speed following:

1) Load variations up to 100% of the rated torque.
2) Root mean square variations of the supply voltage of +10/-15% (or higher,
depending on each case) with respect to the rated value.
3) Temperature variations of 10C.
ANALOG INPUTS No. 3 configurable analog inputs and No. 1 fixed analog input, 12-bit
resolution + sign. No. 2 voltage analog inputs 10Vdc (input resistance 20k)
or current analog inputs 420mA (load resistance 200) are available with
differential input or common-mode (in both cases). Possibility of application of
Bias, Gain, Polarity, Reverse operators. Minimum speed function available by
request.
INTERNAL REFERENCES Seven preset run references and 2 jog references are provided. One run
reference is also available, that can be used for the Motorized Potentiometer
function.
RAMP FUNCTION Fully digital function with independent setting (may also be external) of
acceleration or deceleration time duration for both running directions. Outside
zero setting command for ramp times. Possibility of initial or final ramp
rounding with 2nd type function. In the DCREG4, automatic extension of the
acceleration or deceleration ramps whenever the load requires a torque value
very close to the maximum torque (in both cases, either motor or braking
respectively). In DCREG2, automatic extension of the deceleration ramp
whenever inferior to the coasting time. In that way the ramp generated inside
the drive is always related to the motor actual speed.
19/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
ANALOG OUTPUTS No. 2 configurable analog outputs, 12-bit resolution. Possibility of application
of Bias, Gain, Polarity operators. V Out voltage signal proportional to the
motor running speed. I Out current signal proportional to the supplied
armature current (double polarity or positive single polarity only).
DIGITAL INPUTS No. 6 configurable digital inputs for different functions and No. 2 fixed digital
inputs for the START and ENABLE commands. All inputs are optoinsulated and
PLC-controllable with PNP static outputs.
DIGITAL OUTPUTS 5 configurable relay digital outputs. On the digital outputs the following
functions may be programmed: energizing delay, de-energizing delay, positive
or negative logic, hysteresis.
LOCAL MODE
OPERATION For the LOCAL mode operation, the drive may be equipped with a keypad (by
request) with a backlit alphanumeric display, 8 keys and 8 LEDs. The jog,
running / stop and reference reversal commands may also be entered through
the keypad, in addition to the LOCAL mode switching to the ordinary operating
mode stored on EEPROM.
The keypad may be removed or remote controlled. Once the drive has been
set, it may be operated also with no keypad connection. Both 7-segment
displays can be seen through a special slot fitted on the cover of the ES800
(ES906) control board (together with the four LEDs) for the most important
indications.
DRIVE
ADJUSTMENTS The ES800 (ES906) control board is equipped with an EEPROM (non volatile
memory) where all the special parameters of the drive together with the
machine adjustments are stored after automatic tuning procedures or
according to the users requirements. The EEPROM is an 8-pin component
fitted on a socket which can be very easily removed and then fitted on an
additional board in case of possible failures, with no need to repeat the
machine running procedure. Possibility of restoring the default parameters or
any parameters relating to a special configuration including prior back-up.
Possibility of displaying only the parameters having a current value different
from the default value. Firmware updating via serial source downloading (using
FLASH memory). For more information, please ask for the DCREG FIRMWARE
UPDATING VIA SERIAL COMMUNICATION manual (code 16B0211A1).
PROTECTIONS From output short-circuit: ultra-fast fuses to be fitted externally by the Customer
for DCREG Size 1 2A. Already fitted inside in DCREG MODULAR.S.
dV
From excessive on thyristors: R-C single filters together with the varistors on
dt
the three-phase line.
From lack of drive ventilation: alarm A002 from thermo switch on heatsink.
From drive overload: alarm A022 from Ixt thermal image of the same.
From motor overload: alarm A021 from I2t thermal image of the same.
From armature overcurrent: alarm A003.
From field overcurrent: alarm A009.
From field regulator failure: alarm A001, A023.
From armature overvoltage: alarm A010.
From load loss: alarm A004.
From unstable or out of range mains frequency: alarms A006 and A012.
From mains supply three-phase failure: alarms A007, A013, A016 and A017,
with possibility of disabling any alarm related to mains microlosses.
20/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
From speed feedback failure: alarm A008.

From automatic tuning failure: alarms A011, A014, A015, A018 and A019.
From general external failure: alarm A020, A029 and A030.
From EEPROM failure: alarms A024, A025, A026 and A031.
From serial communication failure: alarm A027.
From bus field connection failure: alarm A028.
STANDARDS DCREG drives comply with Low-Voltage Directive and Electromagnetic

Compatibility Directive. As for the Machine Directive, the drives are
considered as a component part, not a whole machine. In accordance with this
directive, Elettronica Santerno releases the Manufacturers Statement for
DCREG2 and DCREG4.
Said drives particularly comply with the standards below.
Low-voltage DIRECTIVE (73/23/CEE and following amendment 93/68/CEE):
EN60146-1-1/IEC146-1-1: Semiconductor converters. General requirements

and line-commutated converters. Part 1-1: Specifications of basic requirements.
EN61800-2/IEC1800-2: Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems. Part

1: Rating specifications for low voltage d.c. power drive systems.
EN50178: Electronic equipment for use in power installations. pollution

degree: 2
EN60529/IEC529: Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code).

degree of protection: IP00
EN60204-1/IEC204-1: Safety of machinery. Electrical equipment of machines.

Part 1: General requirements.
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY DIRECTIVE (89/336/CEE and following

amendments 92/31/CEE, 93/68/CEE and 93/97/CEE):
- IMMUNITY:
EN61000-4-2/IEC1000-4-2: Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Part 4:
Testing and measurement techniques. Section 2: Electrostatic discharge
immunity tests. EMC Basic Publication. level 3: 6kV for contact discharge,
8kV for air discharge.

Testing and measurement techniques. Section 3: Radiated, radio-frequency,
electromagnetic field immunity test. level 3: field intensity: 10V/m

Testing and measurement techniques. Section 4: Electrical fast transient/burst
immunity test. EMC Basic Publication. level 3: 2kV/5kHz for power-supply
ports, 1kV/5kHz for signal interfaces, 2kV/5kHz for measurement and control
ports.
21/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL

Testing and measurement techniques. Section 5: Surge immunity test. level
3: 1kV for line/line connection and 2kV for line/ground connection.
- RADIOFREQUENCY RADIATED DISTURBANCE:

EN61800-3/IEC1800-3, second environment (industrial grid) with no RFI
filter
EN61800-3, first environment (civic grid), EN55011 group 1, class A and B,
EN55022 class A and B using optional RFI filters
For the definition of first environment and second environment and for the
instructions on how to choose the filters to be used, see chapter EMC
CHARACTERISTICS AND INPUT FILTERS.
WORKING
TEMPERATURES From 0 to 40C ambient temperature. 2% derating for each degree of
temperature increase.
MAXIMUM OPERATING
ALTITUDE 1000m (a.s.l.). 1% derating for each 100m of altitude increase.
RELATIVE HUMIDITY 20 90% (non-condensing).
WEIGHT Size 1:
13 kg for DCREG.10 40
14 kg for DCREG.70
15 kg for DCREG.100 180
18 kg for DCREG2.250 350
19 kg for DCREG4. 250 350
Size 2:
45 kg for DCREG2 except for:
38 kg for DCREG2.410 ... 600 @ 600Vmax
48 kg for DCREG4 except for:

40 kg for DCREG4.410 ... 600 @ 600Vmax
Size 2A:
51 kg for DCREG2. Size 2A
54 kg for DCREG4. Size 2A
MODULAR.S (Total weight of control unit + power unit)

79 kg for DCREG2.1600-1800-2000S (Size A)
124 kg for DCREG2.2300-2500(@500V, 600V)S (Size B)
164 kg for DCREG2.2500(@690V)-2700-3000S (Size C)
206 kg for DCREG2.3500S (Size D)
319 kg for DCREG2.4500S (Size E)
84 kg for DCREG4.1050-1250-1400S (Size F)
159 kg for DCREG4.1600-1800-2000S (Size G)
229 kg for DCREG4.2300-2500(@500V, 600V)S (Size H)
289 kg for DCREG4.2500(@690V)-2700-3000S (Size I)
331 kg for DCREG4.3500S (Size J)
624 kg for DCREG4.4500S (Size K)
57 kg for DCREG2.1050S (Size L)
22/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
3.2 RATINGS
DCREG2(4) Size 1 ... 2A

Power supply 440Vac max. for ARMATURE circuit. Power supply 200 ... 500Vac for FIELD circuit (see Note 1)
DIMENSIONS
LxDxH (mm)
DISSIPATED
ULTRAFAST
ULTRAFAST
ARMATURE
ARMATURE
VOLTAGE
VOLTAGE
CURRENT
CURRENT
(FU1-2-3)
RATED DI
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
DC-SIDE
AC-SIDE
MODEL
POWER
RATED
FUSES
FUSES
FIELD
FIELD
(FU4)
(Vdc)
(Vdc)
SIZE
(W)
(A)
(A)
DCREG2.10 3540A 3540A
10 30
DCREG4.10 00T/80 00T/80
DCREG2.20 3540A 3540A
20 60
DCREG4.20 00T/80 00T/80
DCREG2.40 3540A 50A
40 5 120
DCREG4.40 00T/80 00T/80
DCREG2.70 80A 100A
70 210
DCREG4.70 00T/80 00T/80
DCREG2.100 100A 125A
100 300
1 214x264x440 DCREG4.100 00T/80 00T/80
DCREG2.150 DCREG2: 160A 200A
150 450
DCREG4.150 530 max 00T/80 00T/80
DCREG2.180 (440 Vin) 160A 250A
180 540
DCREG4.180 00T/80 00T/80
425 max
DCREG2.250 15 250A 315A
250 (500 Vin) 750
DCREG4.250 00T/80 00T/80
DCREG4: 375400
DCREG2.350 460 max 315A
350 A 1050
DCREG4.350 (440 Vin) 00T/80
00T/80
DCREG2.410 450A 550A
410 1230
DCREG4.410 2T/80 2T/80
DCREG2.500 550A 700A
500 1500
2 DCREG4.500 2T/80 3T/80
333x360x596
DCREG2.600 630A 800A
600 35 1800
DCREG4.600 2T/80 3T/80
DCREG2.900 900A 1250A
900 2700
DCREG4.900 3T/80 3T/80
DCREG2.1200 1100A 1400A
2A 333x453x685 1200 3600
DCREG4.1200 3T/80 3T/80
By request, Elettronica Santerno can provide drives of any size with a field rated
NOTE current different than the standard value, which is 5A for DCREG.100max, 15A for
DCREG.150min Size 1 and 35A for DCREG Size 2, 2A and MODULAR.S
(1) For drives assembled till 30th June 2006 only, in order to supply terminals E1-2 with a voltage
ranging from 200 to 240Vac, enable jumper J1 on field regulator ES734 in position 230 ON.
In that case, the max. field output voltage is 205Vdc (240 Vin).
23/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
DCREG2(4) Size 1 ... 2A / DCREG2(4) MODULAR.S

Power supply 500 Vac max. for ARMATURE circuit. Power supply 200 ... 500Vac for FIELD circuit (see Note 1)
POWER UNIT)
DIMENSIONS
(For Modular
LxDxH (mm)
DISSIPATED
ULTRAFAST
ULTRAFAST
ARMATURE
ARMATURE
VOLTAGE
VOLTAGE
CURRENT
CURRENT
(FU1-2-3)
RATED DI
measures
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
DC-SIDE
AC-SIDE
MODEL
POWER
refer to
RATED
FUSES
FUSES
types,
FIELD
FIELD
(FU4)
(Vdc)
(Vdc)
SIZE
(W)
(A)
(A)
DCREG2.10 3540A 3540A
10 30
DCREG4.10 00T/80 00T/80
DCREG2.20 3540A 3540A
20 60
DCREG4.20 00T/80 00T/80
DCREG2.40 3540A 50A
40 5 120
DCREG4.40 00T/80 00T/80
DCREG2.70 80A 100A
70 210
DCREG4.70 00T/80 00T/80
DCREG2.100 100A 125A
100 300
1 214x264x440 DCREG4.100 00T/80 00T/80
150 450
DCREG4.150 600 max 00T/80 00T/80
DCREG2.180 (500 Vin) 160A 250A
180 540
DCREG4.180 00T/80 00T/80
425 max
DCREG2.250 15 250A 315A
250 (500 Vin) 750
DCREG4.250 00T/80 00T/80
DCREG4: 375400
DCREG2.350 520 max 315A
350 A 1050
DCREG4.350 (500 Vin) 00T/80
00T/80
DCREG2.410 450A 550A
410 1230
DCREG4.410 2T/80 2T/80
DCREG2.500 550A 700A
500 1500
2 DCREG4.500 2T/80 3T/80
333x360x596
DCREG2.600 630A 800A
600 35 1800
DCREG4.600 2T/80 3T/80
DCREG2.900 900A 1250A
900 2700
DCREG4.900 3T/80 3T/80
DCREG2.1200 1100A 1400A
2A 333x453x685 1200 3600
DCREG4.1200 3T/80 3T/80
500x275x860 (Size F) DCREG4.1400S 1400 4200

500x275x860 (Size A) DCREG2.1600S
1600 4800
500x375x1410 (Size G) DCREG4.1600S
500x275x860 (Size A) DCREG2.1800S
1800 5400
500x375x1410 (Size G) DCREG4.1800S
500x275x860 (Size A) DCREG2.2000S DCREG2: 2000 6000
500x375x1410 (Size G) DCREG4.2000S 600 max
620x360x884 (Size B) DCREG2.2300S (500 Vin)
MODULAR.S
2300 6900
620x495x1434 (Size H) DCREG4.2300S
425 max
620x360x884 (Size B) DCREG2.2500S 35 - -
2500 (500 Vin) 7500
620x495x1434 (Size H) DCREG4.2500S
712x395x945 (Size C) DCREG2.2700S DCREG4:
520 max 2700 8100
712x495x1505 (Size I) DCREG4.2700S
712x395x945 (Size C) DCREG2.3000S (500 Vin)
3000 9000
712x495x1505 (Size I) DCREG4.3000S
784x415x1110 (Size D) DCREG2.3500S
3500 10500
784x460x1790 (Size J) DCREG4.3500S
968x482x1250 (Size E) DCREG2.4500S
4500 13500
988x543x2070 (Size K) DCREG4.4500S
24/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL

POWER UNIT)
DIMENSIONS
(For Modular
LxDxH (mm)
DISSIPATED
ULTRAFAST
ULTRAFAST
ARMATURE
ARMATURE
VOLTAGE
VOLTAGE
CURRENT
CURRENT
(FU1-2-3)
RATED DI
measures
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
DC-SIDE
AC-SIDE
MODEL
POWER
refer to
RATED
FUSES
FUSES
types,
FIELD
FIELD
(FU4)
(Vdc)
(Vdc)
SIZE
(W)
(A)
(A)
DCREG2.10 3540A 3540A
10 30
DCREG4.10 00T/80 00T/80
DCREG2.20 3540A 3540A
20 60
DCREG4.20 00T/80 00T/80
DCREG2.40 3540A 50A
40 5 120
DCREG4.40 00T/80 00T/80
DCREG2.70 80A 100A
70 210
DCREG4.70 00T/80 00T/80
DCREG2.100 100A 125A
100 300
1 214x264x440 DCREG4.100 00T/80 00T/80
150 450
DCREG4.150 720 max 00T/80 00T/80
DCREG2.180 (600 Vin) 160A 250A
180 540
DCREG4.180 00T/80 00T/80
425 max
DCREG2.250 15 250A 315A
250 (500 Vin) 750
DCREG4.250 00T/80 00T/80
DCREG4: 375400
DCREG2.350 630 max 315A
350 A 1050
DCREG4.350 (600 Vin) 00T/80
00T/80
DCREG2.410 450A 550A
410 1230
DCREG4.410 2T/80 2T/80
DCREG2.500 550A 700A
500 1500
2 DCREG4.500 2T/80 3T/80
333x360x596
DCREG2.600 630A 800A
600 35 1800
DCREG4.600 2T/80 3T/80
DCREG2.750 800A 1000A
750 2250
DCREG4.750 3T/80 3T/80
DCREG2.900 900A 1250A
2A 333x453x685 900 2700
DCREG4.900 3T/80 3T/80
500x275x665 (Size L) DCREG2.1050S 1050 3150

500x275x860 (Size F) DCREG4.1250S 1250 3750
500x275x860 (Size A) DCREG2.1600S
1600 4800
500x375x1410 (Size G) DCREG4.1600S
500x275x860 (Size A) DCREG2.1800S
1800 5400
500x375x1410 (Size G) DCREG4.1800S
DCREG2:
500x275x860 (Size A) DCREG2.2000S
720 max 2000 6000
500x375x1410 (Size G) DCREG4.2000S
(600 Vin)
MODULAR.S
620x360x884 (Size B) DCREG2.2300S

2300 6900
620x495x1434 (Size H) DCREG4.2300S 425 max
35 - -
620x360x884 (Size B) DCREG2.2500S (500 Vin)
2500 7500
620x495x1434 (Size H) DCREG4.2500S DCREG4:
712x395x945 (Size C) DCREG2.2700S 630 max 2700 8100
712x495x1505 (Size I) DCREG4.2700S (600 Vin)
712x395x945 (Size C) DCREG2.3000S
3000 9000
712x495x1505 (Size I) DCREG4.3000S
784x415x1110 (Size D) DCREG2.3500S
3500 10500
784x460x1790 (Size J) DCREG4.3500S
968x482x1250 (Size E) DCREG2.4500S
4500 13500
988x543x2070 (Size K) DCREG4.4500S
25/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL

POWER UNIT)
DIMENSIONS
(For Modular
LxDxH (mm)
DISSIPATED
ULTRAFAST
ULTRAFAST
ARMATURE
ARMATURE
VOLTAGE
VOLTAGE
CURRENT
CURRENT
(FU1-2-3)
RATED DI
measures
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
DC-SIDE
AC-SIDE
MODEL
POWER
refer to
RATED
FUSES
FUSES
types,
FIELD
FIELD
(FU4)
(Vdc)
(Vdc)
SIZE
(W)
(A)
(A)
DCREG2.10 3540A 3540A
10 30
DCREG4.10 00T/80 00T/80
DCREG2.20 3540A 3540A
20 60
DCREG4.20 00T/80 00T/80
DCREG2.40 3540A 50A
40 5 120
DCREG4.40 00T/80 00T/80
DCREG2.70 80A 100A
70 210
DCREG4.70 00T/80 00T/80
DCREG2.100 100A 125A
100 300
1 214x264x440 DCREG4.100 00T/80 00T/80
150 450
DCREG4.150 800 max 00T/80 00T/80
DCREG2.180 (690 Vin) 160A 250A
180 540
DCREG4.180 00T/80 00T/80
425 max
DCREG2.250 15 250A 315A
250 (500 Vin) 750
DCREG4.250 00T/80 00T/80
DCREG4: 375400
DCREG2.350 720 max 315A
350 A 1050
DCREG4.350 (690 Vin) 00T/80
00T/80
DCREG2.410 450A 550A
410 1230
DCREG4.410 2T/80 2T/80
DCREG2.500 550A 700A
500 1500
2 DCREG4.500 2T/80 3T/80
333x360x596
DCREG2.600 630A 800A
600 35 1800
DCREG4.600 2T/80 3T/80
DCREG2.750 800A 1000A
750 2250
DCREG4.750 3T/80 3T/80
DCREG2.900 900A 1250A
2A 333x453x685 900 2700
DCREG4.900 3T/80 3T/80
500x275x665 (Size L) DCREG2.1050S

1400 3150
500x275x860 (Size F) DCREG4.1050S
500x275x860 (Size A) DCREG2.1600S
1600 4800
500x375x1410 (Size G) DCREG4.1600S
500x275x860 (Size A) DCREG2.2000S
DCREG2: 2000 6000
500x375x1410 (Size G) DCREG4.2000S
800 max
620x360x884 (Size B) DCREG2.2300S
(690 Vin) 2300 6900
MODULAR.S
620x495x1434 (Size H) DCREG4.2300S

712x395x945 (Size C) DCREG2.2500S 425 max
2500 35 - - 7500
712x495x1505 (Size I) DCREG4.2500S (500 Vin)
712x395x945 (Size C) DCREG2.2700S DCREG4: 2700 8100
712x495x1505 (Size I) DCREG4.2700S 720 max
712x395x945 (Size C) DCREG2.3000S (690 Vin) 3000 9000
712x495x1505 (Size I) DCREG4.3000S
784x415x1110 (Size D) DCREG2.3500S
3500 10500
784x460x1790 (Size J) DCREG4.3500S
968x482x1250 (Size E) DCREG2.4500S
4500 13500
988x543x2070 (Size K) DCREG4.4500S
NOTE: By request, Elettronica Santerno can provide drives of any size with a field
NOTE rated current different than the standard value, which is 5A for DCREG.100max,
15A for DCREG.150min Size 1 and 35A for DCREG Size 2, 2A and MODULAR.S
26/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
OVERLOAD CAPACITY
Repetitive overload cycle, I = k I(base) for 1m and I = I(base) for 9m @ T = 40C (room temperature), available
after an operation at a current not larger than the rated value I DRIVEnom (par. C000) for a period sufficient for
temperature stabilization.
IARM (A)
K Ibase
IDRIVE nom
Ibase
1min 9min
I(base)
K
BASE CURRENT
(par. P060, P061)
SIZE MODEL FOR SPECIFIED
OVERLOAD
OVERLOAD
PERCENTAGE
(A)
DCREG2(4).10 10
DCREG2(4).20 20
DCREG2(4).40 40
DCREG2(4).70 70
Gr.1 DCREG2(4).100 100
DCREG2(4).150 150
DCREG2(4).180 180
DCREG2(4).250 250
150%
DCREG2(4).350 350
DCREG2(4).410 410
DCREG2(4).500 500
Gr.2 DCREG2(4).600 600
DCREG2(4).750 750
DCREG2(4).900 900
DCREG2(4).900 900
Gr.2A
DCREG2(4).1200 1200
DCREG2(4).1050 1000
DCREG4.1250 1100
DCREG4.1400 1200
DCREG2(4).1600 1400
DCREG2(4).1800 1640
DCREG2(4).2000 1750
MODULAR.S 125%
DCREG2(4).2300 2000
DCREG2(4).2500 2200
DCREG2(4).2700 2480
DCREG2(4).3000 2500
DCREG2(4).3500 3000
DCREG2(4).4500 3700
27/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
3.3 DCREG SIZE 1 OVERALL DIMENSIONS
~100
D\ r
ill 000000000000000000000000000000000 ill
0000000000000000
00000000000000000
0000000000000000
00?~0000000000000
111 000000000000~00 Q)
00000000000000000
Bl 1~
~
lr
~
~100
265
i @
@
r
0
@
RtN ~!lt'.lliMr
~ ~.mtt:llffi(IJiT
1111111111111111111
a53m
EJ~EJEJ
<0
'
0
' ~ ill
L______J '""4ll ~
28/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
3.4 DCREG SIZE 1 THROUGH-PANEL ASSEMBLY
1 - Direction of the cooling air flow

2 - Fixing panel
3 - Slot to be made in the fixing panel
4 - Through-panel assembly kit parts
29/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
3.5 DCREG SIZE 2 OVERALL DIMENSIONS
333
0 0000 00
0000000
0000000
~150
~ 0 -
0
0
0 0
00
00
00 !lllllllllllllll!
8~~8
00 B~BEI
fi>1
00
00
/""0
0
0
0
0 ee o lvJ .\.
~ 0 o luJ 0 0
~
1~--'-----L
~ FASTENING WITH 4
M5 SCREWS
252 (FASTENING JIG)
30/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
3.6 DCREG SIZE 2A OVERALL DIMENSIONS
333
Di J 0000000
w.200
0000000
0000000
0 0
lUJ
_8_LUJ
Jill
[<o~'
-=
""' "'
"'
'
0 0
~~ ~
= = ,_
0
0
A A A 1-
0
000
000
000 ra
====~-: <0
=;
<.:>
z
000 El~EI8
fil
25
>--
g
0
"'
"' "'
00
"'
000 "'
:;l
000
0
0 fd ([})
0
00
0
0
IJ. l VJ
0
0 l vJ
.\.
0 0
~
~=
~ FASTENING WITH
4 M6 SCREWS
252 (FASTENING JIG)
31/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
3.7 DCREG SIZE 2 AND SIZE 2A THROUGH-PANEL

ASSEMBLY
- Size 2
1 - Direction of the secondary cooling air flow

2 - Direction of the main cooling air flow
3 - Fixing panel
4 - Slot to be made in the fixing panel
- Size 2A
32/192
3.8 DCREG MODULAR.S SIZE A POWER SECTION OVERALL
DCREG4
DCREG2
275
~ ~
0240
~
tr1 t ~-r
.-+
ll
.-+
l[)
r-J 50x10
DIMENSIONS
0
I r. . . . . . .r~-- --~._/j
~~===~
I I I I
co I I I I
L... ----"L--- ___ J"-. .._ ._J
I
~
\ ~
7 ~I I [
E I !Fans
ITIJ,...r{1Terminal 0
r<l
,~~
"'
I
I
I
I
r-J _J I 12.5
~I + I + partie. A
I~
A
a m ffi
,,
- 1-
----,
J
L{)
~~A
r-Jl---
L[)
('~
('~ ( 1\ l[)
(""'.
~ lJ
~~==i~--q
I
TH TH TH Sl
2A 4A 6A 0
.-f I I I
~I ~
I I I
0
('~
('~
t+ ~ ~ ~Ht- ["-- --= 1- 1 2 .~: : 25 : I
Gl . . .
~ Ill
~
s po rtic. B
._j-
L[) ttjli_ rnli_
L()
('~
('~
<D
~M12
( 1\
~ lJ
r--------,
L F=
A: II
~ L1
1-tt--
1~1~1 + 1~1$1 + '~'
n' 4 (7)11 -
0 1- L~
L()
"'I $ $ I -
L~
rnl1 1$1~
L2
~~~
L3
0
0
30 I 85
~152 152 153 107

33/192
10 ~ 480 10 265
15P0059B3
~
MANUAL
500 I Size A I
A
USER
l:t~-~
34/192
3.9 DCREG MODULAR.S SIZE B POWER SECTION OVERALL
MANUAL
USER
15P0059B3
290 "
DIMENSIONS
60-'C
---------- ----------
r--r-r
I I
L... - ---1...- ~---~
- - - _____ j
I 1
____J l()
-- $-- t-
--
~
E Fans ....-- I I I
Terminal v I I I
DTI "' L
15. I I .3o !
<(
po rtic. A
~I$+ m A
$
+ B
---m-
D
$~ ~
+ C
~
0
:r~
0 0 00
~ ~
,--------,
B II~ ,ffJ,~ TH
~~
4A
{:;j {:;j
\'
U')
C"<
7
.f-
"' U)
w
['
~
wf4-1~
A1 --I : :
Al~ I I I
=
1 5. I I .30_1
0
z
['
- po rtic . B
A2
,-----+---,
~
lli:: mr- rn
,-----t-
I ! I
L +~f--
U')
C"<
..,.
U)
!iii
~.
~ "'
II
c A2
I(}
rn
[' I Til
~12
wl_I;_
Q)
'----- Ll
1--<}t----- n6 11 L2
+ $ + $ 0
U')
j
L3
30
0
ij1
N
L1
I'*' I'*' I
l!.j_!J L2 l;J _j,L~3 _ _-----r-1_
23.3 92
62 .5 192
' 1>1?
10 ~ 600 10
~ Fi ?O
ISize al
DCREG4
DCREG2
~A
3.10 DCREG MODULAR.S SIZE C POWER SECTION OVERALL
DCREG4
DCREG2
:no
DIMENSIONS
'PJL U
-+ .+ -+ I
I I I I
~---,-"-~--- --t-------_J,_--~
n E I !fans
l~/l __ ----- _________l~~~J
IT:rrrJ ITIJ...-----r'Terminal ~ L
<i
B
8 n A B DC lll
m
~4::,
II $+ $+ EB $+EB EB ~
r--
R,r--~2x8Dx8
,,
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
~t~r+-- ~ - ~ ~ -
( IJ ~- ~- ~- 0 $-- t-
--
,;,-.c-- V TH TH TH .,;-
~ ~ u 0 -- +-- t-
0 {)I f::::= {)I F== {)I F== "' "' o --
~j f--- I-- I-- (',J f::: (',J I
I I
I 1
I
2Q I : 4Q !
I
I;===; I;===; I;===; ~
I+ ~ ~ -l==J- !if- "' partie. B
A2 -.,_
*
TH ~ - TH ~ - TH ~ -
Gl . . .
~ Ill
3A 5 tO
,-c-- -- ,-c-- 0
K} f::::=
f--
K} F==
f--
K} F==
f--
;:] oc
II
l[)
tO
~' ~M12
1=1= I;===; == I;===; 1=1= I;===;
-- -- ~ -- -- -1 --- tt ~ n.,
n6 11
+ + + "'
.. ..
L1 L2 L3
0
v~ ~
( ~
~
"-F-< -- ~c-- -
70 \ 222 222 255 100
10 \ 692 10 395
\ 712
lsize C I
35/192
15P0059B3
MANUAL
USER
36/192
3.11 DCREG MODULAR.S SIZE D POWER SECTION OVERALL
MANUAL
USER
15P0059B3
2x70x1 a
DIMENSIONS
J [)l j_ g
I I
n
ITmJ
I
E
I
jFons
ITIJ.-----ITerminal
I I
~
:lJ;1
.- I
' '
I
17.5 : : .35 :
pa rtie. A
1
'
r""'"
A B D C "'
+ m + m ffi-+ ffi-
~~~ ~ oo - ~ oo ,:____ ~ oo ~t- AI
J -,-----' ,---,-----' -r+" n -- $----- E

- r.
~:!~
\ I
kTH
: ~~ -$---Ef
\'
Alf"-
~ _ TH ~ r-- Hl ~ _ g ~
I
)
2A - 4A r-- 6A - N 0>
! -+
'' '' '
:~a: so 1'
)
=
,--- I-- ,---
'=== '=== '=== po rtic. B
rr- - - - ~t- ~
~!i
:::1 I I Ill A2
A2 TH - ,-----' TH ,--- ,-----' TH - ,-+--'

lA 3A 5A
:111 (~ Ill i i-t II I I I I 1:1 111
1----- >1- == - >1- ~ 1----- >1- == g ~.
II
N
!
)
: ,--- I-- ,---
~'=="' '=== ===''==' '=== ~'=="' '=== ~ ll~c_j I II I

~
n 5 11
+
ffi ffi
+ +
ffi "' 3 2.5
v-~ ~
1\
<iHI> ~~ ~ ~
( ~~
~~
IJ Ll ----
~~ L2 $ ~
L-~
L3
----~-_j
237 98 lsize ol
71 \. 242 242
10 ...' \ 764 10
\ 784
DCREG4
DCREG2
A
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
3.12 DCREG MODULAR.S SIZE E POWER SECTION OVERALL

DIMENSIONS
~ ~ ~;;~ ~
I
oc
I
:
os or
I I 0
o_
...
N
0
Ol
N
CXJ
"'
!
~-+!----,j;;.,-~v !
_J I
L~_-_-_-_}
0 0~ ~
0 06 068 oc:; ~
O<; 09 09 I O<; ~
I I
~ T
-f -
u ffi g ----,-r
+EB ~ +jl-+ 1!!1-1 ~ ~~-+ 1!!1-1 EB + - J L

~
I z;< '12
0 :I: ... I~II
Ill
<1' <1' <1' <1'
c 0
rn g I
.... "' "'"'
'"""'
II
<1'<1' <1'<1'
"'c E~
$ $ $ $ :::
""
'=T
"' ffig
-t -
r" w +EB~ ~1-+ 1! 1 - 1 ~ ~~-+ l!il-1 EB +
---rr
"'-
---, - r 0
"' CXJ CXJ
~
- j L <.0 <.0
N
en en
I z;< '12
_J
-t -
C I~ <1'~
"'"'
:I: ... II
Ill
.... ... :r:
'"""' $ *~
.. ffig
I $ $ $ :::
"'"'
----,-r ----,-r
+ EB ~ ~~I -+ 1111-1 ~ ~~-+ Iili-I EB +

0
JL - J L
:::i "'
z;< '12
~~
J!ll ( <l'<l'h
~~ $
Ill
Ill
-t - I $ $ $ ::: \ <l' ~ym

\4-- t__J.
I
--b- --4--- {j)---- +-4 I "

<~ ~ I
OC: c;c:c:
I ~
37/192
38/192
3.13 DCREG MODULAR.S SIZE F POWER SECTION OVERALL
MANUAL
USER
15P0059B3
-
2 75~
240
~---------'1--------"1' "!'
DIMENSIONS
L{)
5 0x10
~ ~ f r-----.rL __ __ J,__... --j ('"

0 I I I I
co
~~===~
I I I I
L....... . . ---t. ___ ___ J'"--._J
l ~1
IE ---~
~ WY~Tecmioo
Fa ns
0
n l{)l I
I
I
I
('~ _! IJ 2 .5
.l\ A B D C
+ + + ~ 11
po rt ic . A
B -fEB -fEB ffi---EEB~ 1
L{)
('('""
Al l{) 50 x8 \'
=
('~ 1---
0
0
('"
('" ~ ~ ~~ ~I ~
['-.
L{)
"' '
~r~-10--g
z
"'..-- - I I : !iii
~.
12.5: : .
25. :'
II
L{)
N
('"
A2 pa rtie . B
'<t
L{)
Ll
t-
o n' 4 11 L2
+ $$ + L{)
L3
30
0
0
~
1 L2 L3
$
152
l$1$1 152 l$1$1_ _+-+--------'
153 107
10 I 480 10
~
2 65
DCREG4
DCREG2
5 00
Siz e F I
~
I
3.14 DCREG MODULAR.S SIZE G POWER SECTION OVERALL
DCREG4
DCREG2
--- -- ----- ----- -----
I
~I I 0
DIMENSIONS
"" ~~
II)
~~--~5
0x10
!
50x10
y~; ~~~lN ; --$--t

\
_j_
~ ITIJ
H Fans
Term inal 0
~
c
' '
~~
---~ "' --$--"
N --I I
~? 'i! ! 2 s I
I
+ + ~
il
I A B G1 + C
0
U)
~
ffi ffi ffi r--
r;
partie. A partie. B
B
t rEP ~~
l~ lE - rw ;:;
"'O<o<
 
 
,,
c
A1
t -- - - - - --
+---- 0
"'"'
TH TH TH
.,. 26 .,. 48 .,. 68
"'~j
0
-"'
I
- - - - ~ -- -
fil
~
"'l
~
! + + +
f--
0
"'
e-
I= I=
~
ffi
00
I= I=
I'FL
ffi
00 ww
G2 F 0
"'
r-- Gl . . .
~ Ill
~~ ~~ ti f~
A2
t
 
 
TH
18
-- -
TH
3B
- -
TH
58
- --
"'c<
N
-+r-- "'"'
0
II
"';
'<t
"'o<
"' ,_ lA
TH
.,_ 3A
TH TH
,_ 5A c<
r-- r--
- - ~ '==
Jf2_ '==
_ffi_
r-- r--
f-- n 4
+ + + D
"'
L1 L2 L3 0
;'
<!> + + + +
39/192
T T 153 107
15P0059B3
56 '152 152
4 60 10
MANUAL
~
"" 500 [Si ze G[
""
USER
A
40/192
3.15 DCREG MODULAR.S SIZE H POWER SECTION OVERALL
MANUAL
USER
15P0059B3
290
60x10
~r~:~:g-i-
--- -~- "
DIMENSIONS
r---f~
~-- ~===~J~~:~;-
Fans l~-j___f_J______L_J
bd H
ITIJ
Terrmin.al
~
<(
0
""' ---- @---EB-

' '
"'..--Tr---- .I I
'
1
1~ i ! 30 i
12 (i) 11
partie. A
8
A1
0
t{)
t{)
--;-
""' partie. B
6 FUSES
\'
=
gr---
0
____
g
<!o ) t----
n ----
!1301!
20x10
60
!' 12 FUSES
z
!iii
~.
II
0
--;-
<')
~ M12
partie. B
10
620
Size H
DCREG4
DCREG2
I I
A
3.16 DCREG MODULAR.S SIZE I POWER SECTION OVERALL
DCREG4
DCREG2
330
~---------J
1
~ ~~~od,~
"l---~
~ r--~ .
11Fans 4---4t-
DIMENSIONS
I n
trrrrJ H
ITIJ Terminal
U") g ____ 2x60x8
~'
0
en
eDt----: :'
.-- :I
)l A B G c 1~ ! i 30 !
rn
8~:+~
$+ E!t g;) 9;)
lt- po rtic. A
<>
2A

r::l~
[~~~ ;1 w w
~I ~~~
~~~~
r--
L_
D
~1{~
1---+---1 L_
E
-s
~<
~
0
c
ar---g
n ----
0
--@---- _;_
gf---- --w-----e-
, , '
'
'
'
120x8
120x10
,,
I
f') ---- I
+ rn + rn
: I
! loi 60 l
:
~mar
oc
~~
po rti c. B
~~ ~ H==l=\ Gl . . .
~ Ill
0
n
ITHSBI~Iwt II 0J
w 1t!~
TH3B i u
~~ lllml"'~
1A
.--t---,1 "--+-
K}
~
f':::::F:!
TH
3A
r+-.1 ~
>:< TH
SA
0
n
~'
~ M12
II
~
k-,,== ==E= n'6 11
---
$ $ $
1!1!1 + "I"
<01 + "I*
<01 +
L1 L2 L3 0 32.5
L[), 0
r-..
~
255 I 1 oo
2??
lill 495
41/192
10 692 10
15P0059B3
7 1? I Size I I
MANUAL
A
USER
42/192
3.17 DCREG MODULAR.S SIZE J POWER SECTION OVERALL
MANUAL
USER
15P0059B3
0 320
r0
~1--------- ~
DIMENSIONS
-$-- -,--
In
bmJ Hf1Fans
ITIIJ Terminal 0
lD
l()
r0 '
----- -ED---ED- '
0
L{) "" 330
L{)
r--: -----
I
i
I
i
A B G C - j ! ! 2x70x10
17.5! i 35 i
$ o 1 rn $~ rn
$ rn l r-----1 ' ,f<H------
l 0 0
r----1
'0 ' '
r--
po rtic. A
r-----1 r-------1 r------1
11~~1 ~ 11~~
I f----, 0
m
B ""
D
;;:;r--g
--- ---$---- -
~ ~, ~
A1 -~
:nl!_____ ---E&----4-
-
lO -----,
'' 'i
\'
s
0 ! ! i 1 ?Ox1?
---"!3""0-'-'-! 60 - i
=
-
~I ~IW + ~llll +
F po rtic. B
+ [ill
' ' l()
z
,--,--- f---.'-'~
TH
58
D
m
""
!iii
~.
'-.i
A2~ ~
~
l
l}t II
~I 1+ 11~ .,l-
TH r~ n 12 11
1A JA SA n"6 !1l11
-- $
+ $
+ r:r
+$
+-----
L1 L2 L3 c
D
L{) Lt; 32.5
71 l~
illf'\
242
11 1
~ 24 2
1:1:
____..
10 ~ 764 10
~ 784
Siz e J
DCREG4
DCREG2
I I
~A
3.18 DCREG MODULAR.S SIZE K POWER SECTION OVERALL
DCREG4
DCREG2
i'l~----=
DIMENSIONS
---- 41 :-
0
41----)
<T !____
'
i'lJ- -
20
j
! !
i ; 2x80x I 0
40 i
po rt ic. A
A1
,,
.~ -~g
-41--- -,
g0
:------$----$
n
---- j
_i3ol_6o _I
'
'
!
'
'
!1 ?nx1 ~
I
Gl . . .
~ Ill
11
~ M12
port ic. B
II
43/192
I Si ze K I
15P0059B3
A
MANUAL
USER
44/192
3.19 DCREG MODULAR.S SIZE L POWER SECTION OVERALL
MANUAL
USER
15P0059B3
275
DIMENSIONS
5 0 x8
? 4 0
rh rh rh _.+, ...)., r~-,l
I
I
~I
I
~II 0
ro
'D Jl
~t I
~w
\
~
+
bd
+
[IIJ/
E ~Fans
Terminal
IJ_
0
r<J
~
[ partie. A
wE8 wEB~W + o+ c
I A B I 0 LD
LD
B +E8 - r-::; ~ ,----- ~~

-H -
,----- r-::; ~
0
I'-
L[) ~
~
-f.-
~
f-----J
('"
~
LD
N
\'
\
~t:=___, ~ t:=___,
( \
:J
t:>
Lu
TH t:.~~
=
TH TH fc<I= ___J
LD
- 2A 1- 4A f- 6A q- ~ __) ('"
z
~
)
\-
TH
1A
r--= =----'
--
1---
TH
3A
r--= =----'
- -
f-
TH
SA
r--= =-----'
--
0
<D
('"
0
<D
r<J
'c
( 1\
A1
po rti c. B II I
...
~
1:1 111
rr rr :J
J
~.
t-- -----1 t-- -----1 t-- ------1
1--- f-
\__ LJ I
T
II
~M12
A2 1--- f-
t= A2
~
F
L1 n4 11 - ~
J =F
E8 L2
EBI
L3
E8
)
1---r - 1--- -
) 0 L1
+ + + LD t---..1$$ I ___j
L~
30 l 85 J L3
~~~ll
~
~
l!~ ~
50
152 152
50
10
" ~
4 80
5 00
10
153
2 65
57 1
J I Siz e L I
A
DCREG4
DCREG2
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
3.20 DCREG MODULAR.S CONTROL UNIT OVERALL

DIMENSIONS
o\ r,....
<!) 0000000000000000000000000000000 $
0000000000000000
000000000000000
000000000 00
(jl C!l
h (
265 214 FASTENING WITH

189 4 MS SCREWS
I
@ 1/
h
@
/ IF 1

@) 0
@
ffLH FWHJtEJ~
fiRfT .fiBKI"I~flf~lJir
111111111111111111 1
Er-~1;]
~A ~
El~ElEJ
0
riD ll)
"<t
"<t
OJ
@) 0 ,....,
@
' e <1l
I~
@) 0
'~ ~ e
~
lie
~ ),.._
45/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
3.21 DCREG SIZE 1...2A POWER CONNECTIONS

VALID FOR DCREG SIZE1...2A FOR MAINS UP TO 500 Vac
L1
500Vac ma x
L2
L3
(*) VEDI NOTA

(SEE NOTE)
FU5 FU6 FU8 FU9 FU12

220Vac
{solo per DCREG Gr.2A)
(for DCREG Gr.2A only)
_l __ l __ j_
I A I
'--rr-'
: *(B)
A1 A2
:
F1
+
F2
TERRA
(GROUND)
(*) NOTA: Alimentare in tensione

alternate ai mars. 53-54
OPPURE in tensione continua
ai mars. 44- 42.
(NOTE: Supply term. 53-54
with AC voltage .QE_ term.
44- 42 with DC voltage)
46/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
VALID FOR DCREG SIZE 1...2A FOR MAINS EXCEEDING 500 Vac
L1
L2
L3
[~ ,------------,FU FU FU
FU1 FU2 FU3
13 14 15
mm[
TS
\ \
KM '
' STANDARD
200...500Vac
(*) VEDI NOTA
(SEE NOTE)
_r------'"'"''-------~
I I STANDARD
380... 500Voc 24Vdc
I I I I
L
FU FU FU
m [~ 6 [~ 7 [ 18 m [J m
220Vac FU6 FUB FU9 FU12
(solo per DCREG Gr.2A)
(for DCREG Gr.2A only)
FU10
[J m FU11
+ -
1~I]'_ ~,
E1 E2 SS 56 57 53 54 42
I A I ~
: *(B) : _L I* I
'--rr~
_r,L~-----,--lA 1 A2
+~ ~-----------~~~---------------~
F1 F2
TERRA (-) ( +)
(GROUND)
FU4 [
(*) NOTA: Alimentore in tensione

alternata ai mars. 53-54
OPPURE in tensione continua
oi mars. 44-42.
(NOTE: Supply term. 53-54
w1th AC voltage OR term.
44-42 with DC voltage)
47/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
3.22 DCREG MODULAR.S POWER CONNECTIONS

VALID FOR DCREG MODULAR.S FOR MAINS UP TO 500 Vac
(*) VEDI NOTA

(SEE NOTE)
NOTE (*) : Supply term. 53-54 with AC voltage OR term. 44-42 with DC voltage.
48/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
VALID FOR DCREG MODULAR.S FOR MAINS EXCEEDING 500 Vac
(*) VEDI NOTA

(SEE NOTE)
NOTE (*) : Supply term. 53-54 with AC voltage OR term. 44-42 with DC voltage.
49/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
3.23 DCREG MODULAR.S POWER UNIT WIRING DIAGRAM
-(+)
+(-)
A1
A2
TH5B
TH6A
TH6B
TH5A
L3
TH3B
TH4A
TH4B
TH3A
L2
TH1B
TH2A
TH2B
TH1A
L1
NOTE TH1B ... 6B thyristors (4 quadrants operation) in DCREG4 only.
50/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
3.24 DCREG MODULAR.S CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS

G1A A bridge TH1 thyristor gate (to terminal G1A of the Control Unit)
K1A A bridge TH1 thyristor cathode (to terminal K1A of the Control Unit)
G1B B bridge TH1 thyristor gate (to terminal G1B of the Control Unit)
K1B B bridge TH1 thyristor cathode (to terminal K1B of the Control Unit)
P0 Thermo-switches series common (to terminal P0 of the Control Unit)

PT Thermo-switches series NC (to terminal PT of the Control Unit)
L1 L1 bar potential (Note 1)

A1 A1 bar potential (to terminal A1 of the Control Unit)

A2 A2 bar potential (to terminal A2 of the Control Unit)
COM Current transformers common (to terminal COM of the Control Unit)
TAR TAR current transformer output (to terminal TAR of the Control Unit)
TAT TAT current transformer output (to terminal TAT of the Control Unit)
N.B.: TH1B .. 6B thyristors in DCREG4 type only.
(1) NOTE: Terminals L1-L2-L3 in the Control Unit are to be respectively connected to terminals L1-L2-L3
in the Power Unit in case of a mains up to 500Vac, whereas they have to be directly
connected to the secondary in three-phase transformer TS in case of a mains exceeding
500Vac. In the latter case, terminals L1-L2-L3 in the Power Unit have to be left disconnected.
51/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
3.25 SUPPLY AND POWER TERMINALS

Terminal Description Notes
Standard 440Vac max
Electrical connection:
L1
Input bars for armature rectifier DCREG Size 1: 3xM8 (tightening torque: 12Nm)
L2
three-phase bridge power supply. DCREG Size 2 600Amax: 3xM10
L3
DCREG Size 2 750Amin and Size 2A: 3xM12
DCREG MODULAR.S:
see Power Section Overall Dimensions
Standard 600Vdc for DCREG2
520Vdc per DCREG4
Direct current output bars for motor
armature DC power supply.
Electrical connection:
A1 Positive potential on bar A1
DCREG Size 1: 2xM8 (tightening torque: 12Nm)
A2 compared to bar A2, with positive
DCREG Size 2 600Amax: 2xM10
speed reference and drive not in
DCREG Size 2 750Amin and Size 2A: 2xM12
regeneration state.
DCREG MODULAR.S:
see Power Section Overall Dimensions
Standard 200 500Vac
E1 Input for field single-phase bridge DCREG.100max: 5A max, DCREG.150min Size 1:15A max
E2 power supply. (tightening torque: 2.53Nm)
DCREG Size 2(A) e MODULAR.S: 35A max
Direct voltage output for motor Standard 425Vdc max for DCREG2/4
F1 field DC power supply. DCREG.100max: 5A max, DCREG.150min Size 1:15A max
F2 Positive potential on terminal F1 (tightening torque: 2.53Nm)
compared to terminal F2. DCREG Size 2(A) and MODULAR.S: 35A max
PV1 Available on DCREG MODULAR.S only
Cooling fans alarm relay contact.
PV2 To be introduced in external sequence for any alarm signal
1F Internal ultrafast fuses micro- Available on DCREG MODULAR.S only
2F switches series. To be introduced in external sequence for any alarm signal
Input for control section from
42 24Vdc direct voltage.
24Vdc, 1.8A max (tightening torque: 0.5Nm)
44 Positive potential on terminal 44
compared to terminal 42.
Single-phase alternating voltage
input for cooling fans power
51-52 DCREG Size 2A: 230Vac, 1.5A
supply.
(AV1-AV2) DCREG MODULAR.S: 230Vac, 1.3A max
Note: not available for DCREG Size
1-2.
Input for control section power
53 Standard 380 500Vac. See note (1)
supply from single-phase
54 (tightening torque: 0.40.6Nm)
alternating voltage.
Input for synchronizing phases
55 from TS transformer secondary.
56 N.b.: terminals available on 500Vac max
57 DCREG Size 1 ... 2A only, for
supply mains higher than 500Vac.
(1) Note: If the control section is to be supplied with a single-phase alternating voltage, the max.
voltage to be applied to terminals 53-54 is 500Vac. For the mains up to 690Vac,
ELETTRONICA SANTERNO may supply a single-phase, 700/500V transformer, 150VA,
code TR0112260.
52/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
3.26 LEGEND FOR POWER CONNECTIONS

A(B) AC/DC conversion bridge.
N.B.: for DCREG2, the polarities in brackets for bars A1 and A2 refer to the regenerative
operation.
CU Control unit for DCREG MODULAR.S.
FU1-2-3 Ultrafast fuses for DCREG Size 1... 2A.

Fast-acting fuses for DCREG MODULAR.S: in this case, fuses can be replaced by an
automatic circuit breaker.
FU4 Direct current side ultrafast fuse for AC/DC bridge protection.
N.B.: This is required for DCREG2 Size 1 ... 2A for regenerative operation only, and for
DCREG4 Size 1 ... 2A.
FU5-6 Ultrafast fuses protecting the field half-controlled rectifier bridge.
FU8-9 1A fast-acting fuses protecting the connection to terminals 53/54 to the power supply
mains.
FU10-11 2.5A fuses for DCREG Size 2A and DCREG MODULAR.S only, for air-cooling unit.
FU12 2.5A fast-acting fuses for internal switching.
FU13-14-15 1A delay fuses over transformer TS primary.
FU16-17-18 1A delay fuses over transformer TS secondary.

N.B.: they are required for DCREG Size 1 2A only and for a power supply exceeding
500Vac.
KM AC/DC bridge power supply contactor.

In case of DCREG MODULAR.S, contactor can be replaced by an automatic circuit
breaker.
L Switching three-phase impedance.
L1-2-3 50/60Hz three-phase mains.
M Direct current motor (armature circuit + field circuit).
PU DCREG MODULAR.S power unit.
TS Three-phase 50VA 700/500V transformer: phase shift 0.

ELETTRONICA SANTERNO code: TR0108007.
N.B.: This is required for power supply values exceeding 500Vac.
53/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
Whenever requested, it is recommended to use ULTRAFAST FUSES of the

NOTE same type and value indicated on TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS tables, so
as to avoid possible damages of the converter.
Always install a three-phase remote control switch on the A.C. side, together
with a suitable NO auxiliary contact directly in the terminal 24 (ENABLE)
series, as indicated in the SIGNAL CONNECTIONS diagram. Do not connect
NOTE
other single-phase or three-phase loads in parallel to bars L1, L2, L3, since
the remote control switch should only supply the above mentioned bars
through the three-phase impedance.
DO NOT OPEN the remote control switch during the braking phase with
NOTE
regeneration towards the mains.
To optimise the rotation stability on a DCREG4-type converter, it is

NOTE recommended to disable the possible STABILIZATION SERIES which has been
fit on the motor winding.
54/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
3.27 SWITCHING THREE-PHASE INDUCTANCE

A three-phase inductance is to be inserted into the power supply line. The inductance is aimed at:
- Reducing the mains voltage distortions from the sinusoidal form in the drive connecting point.
- Reducing the line current gradients which may cause both radio interferences and induced interferences
in the close lines.
Two series of three-phase inductances are available, named L2 and L4.

They have a different inductance value, i.e. a different phase drop (approx. 6V for the L2-type and 1V for
the L4-type): L2-type shows a better performance than L4-type.
The table below shows the inductance specifications depending on the converter size and by referring to
the power supply voltage values to be applied.
INDUCTANCE INDUCTANCE INDUCTANCE

Drive size
L2 @ 500V TYPE L2 @ 600-690V TYPE L4 TYPE
Code Code Code
DCREG.10 IM0126004 - 2000H IM0127004 - 3451H 3 x IM0100354 - 150H
DCREG.70 IM0126164 - 239H IM0127164 - 412H IM0122104 - 45H
DCREG.100 IM0126164 - 239H IM0127164 - 412H IM0122154 - 30H
DCREG.150 IM0126204 - 156H IM0127204 - 268H IM0122154 - 30H
DCREG.180 IM0126244 - 88H IM0127244 - 151H IM0122204 - 20H
DCREG.250 IM0126244 - 88H IM0127244 - 151H IM0122254 - 15H
DCREG.350 IM0126284 - 61H IM0127284 - 105H IM0122304 - 10H
DCREG.410 IM0126284 - 61H IM0127284 - 105H IM0122304 - 10H
DCREG.500 IM0126324 - 54H IM0127324 - 93H IM0122404 - 6.2H
DCREG.600 IM0126364 - 33H IM0127364 - 58H IM0122404 - 6.2H
DCREG.750 - IM0127364 - 58H IM0122504 - 4.5H
DCREG.900 IM0126404 - 23H IM0127404 - 40H IM0122504 - 4.5H
DCREG.1050 - IM0127404 - 40H IM0122604 - 3H
DCREG.1200 IM0126404 - 23H - IM0122604 - 3H
DCREG.1250 - IM0127444 - 30H IM0122604 - 3H
DCREG.1400 IM0126444 - 18H - IM0122704 - 2.5H
DCREG.1600 IM0126444 - 18H IM0127444 - 30H IM0122704 - 2.5H
DCREG.1800 IM0126484 - 11H IM0127484 - 18H IM0122804 - 1.6H
DCREG.2000 IM0126484 - 11H IM0127484 - 18H IM0122804 - 1.6H
DCREG.2300 IM0126484 - 11H IM0127484 - 18H IM0122804 - 1.6H
DCREG.2500 IM0126484 - 11H IM0127484 - 18H IM0122804 - 1.6H
DCREG.2700 IM0126524 - 8H IM0127524 - 13H IM0122904 - 1.1H
DCREG.3000 IM0126524 - 8H IM0127524 - 13H IM0122904 - 1.1H
DCREG.3500 IM0126524 - 8H IM0127524 - 13H IM0122904 - 1.1H
DCREG.4500 - - -
55/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
3.28 DCREG SIGNAL CONNECTIONS
DCREG2: for
standard usage, supply
the potentiometer
between term. 1 and 2
56/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
3.29 SIGNAL TERMINALS

TERM. Description I/O Ratings
1 +10V: +10V reference voltage output for analog inputs. +10VDC / 10mA max
2 0V: Zerovolt. -
3 -10V: -10V reference voltage output for analog inputs. -10VDC / 10mA max
4 n OUT: Speed signal output for tachometer or any other use. Positive polarity -10 +10VDC
with bridge A running (not in regenerative state). 5mA max
The value 10V corresponds to the max. speed (voltage) feedback signal, i.e.
parameter M001 (nFdbk) is equal to 100%.
If the drive is in armature feedback mode, this output is not enabled.
5-7 REF: Main analog input (5: REF+ / 7: REF-). JP7 on pos. 1-2:
If both signal wires are connected, the two terminals represent a differential input -10 +10VDC
with a high rejection to interferences. Alternatively, with a signal to be reflected to the Rin = 20k
drive 0V, the two terminals represent a common mode input. This common mode
input is a non-reversing input if the signal hot wire is connected to terminal 5 JP7 on pos. 2-3:
when terminal 7 is disconnected, whereas it is a reversing input if it is connected to 20mA max
terminal 7 when terminal 5 is disconnected. Rin = 200
By setting jumper JP7 in terminal board ES801 (JP407 in ES906) on pos. 2-3, the
two terminals will represent an input for a signal expressed in milliAmperes: a
positive reference is generated if the current enters terminal 5 and goes out through
terminal 7. See also the MILLIAMPERE INPUT / OUTPUT SIGNALS chapter.
6 I OUT: Current signal output (filtered) for possible ammeter, or different use. -10 ... +10VDC
Positive polarity with bridge A in operation. The value is 6.67V according to
the rated current of the drive (i.e. 100A for a DCREG.100).
In case of a DCREG4, the mentioned signal can be set as bipolar or unipolar
by means of the parameter P156 (IOutPol).
8 OUT 1: Analog output 1 to be configured with parameter P150 (AnOut1Cfg). JP9 on pos. 1-2:
By setting jumper JP9 in terminal board ES801 (JP409 in ES906) on pos. 1-2, -10 ... +10VDC
the terminal will represent an output for a voltage signal, while when the 5mA max
jumper is set on pos. 2-3, the terminal will represent an output for a signal
expressed in milliAmperes. An outgoing current only may be produced JP9 on pos. 2-3:
towards 0V potential. See also the MILLIAMPERE INPUT / OUTPUT SIGNALS 0 ... 20mA
chapter. 10V max
9 0V: Zerovolt. -
10 OUT 2: Analog output 2 to be configured through parameter P153 (AnOut2Cfg). JP10 on pos. 1-2:
By setting jumper JP10 in terminal board ES801 (JP4010 in ES906) on pos. 1-2, -10 ... +10VDC
the terminal will represent an output for a voltage signal, while when the jumper is 5mA max
set on pos. 2-3, the terminal will represent an output for a signal expressed in
milliAmperes. An outgoing current only may be produced towards 0V potential. See JP10 on pos. 2-3:
also the MILLIAMPERE INPUT / OUTPUT SIGNALS chapter. 0 ... 20mA
10V max
11-13 IN 1: Analog input 1 (11: IN 1+ / 13: IN 1-) to be configured through JP8 on pos. 1-2:
parameter C120 (AnIn1Cfg). If both signal wires are connected, the two -10 +10VDC
terminals represent a differential input with a high rejection to interferences. Rin = 20k
Alternatively, with a signal to be reflected to the drive 0V, the two terminals
represent a common mode input. This common mode input is a non-reversing JP8 on pos. 2-3:
input if the signal hot wire is connected to terminal 11 when terminal 13 is 20mA max
disconnected, whereas it is a reversing input if it is connected to terminal 13 Rin = 200
when terminal 11 is disconnected.
By setting jumper JP8 in terminal board ES801 (JP408 in ES906) on pos. 2-3,
the two terminals will represent an input for a signal expressed in
Milliamperes: a positive reference is generated if the current enters terminal
11 and goes out through terminal 13. See also the MILLIAMPERE INPUT /
OUTPUT SIGNALS chapter.
57/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL

12 CH N: Zero position pulse of the encoder. -
14 CH A: Channel A of the encoder. 102.400kHz max
15 +5V: +5V mains supply voltage for the encoder. It is optoinsulated from the +5VDC
0V signal of analog inputs. 160mA max
16 CH B: Channel B of the encoder. 102.400kHz max
17 IN 2: Analog input 2 to be configured through parameter C121(AnIn2Cfg). -10 +10VDC
Rin = 20k
18 0V: Zerovolt. -
19 IN 3: Analog input 3 to be configured through parameter C122 (AnIn3Cfg). -10 +10VDC
Rin = 20kW
20 DT 25Vmax: Input for a tacho when it does not exceed the absolute value -25 +25VDC
equal to 25V. Polarity has to be a positive one with bridge A running (not in a Rin 5k
regenerative state).
21 0V: Zerovolt. -
equal to 80V. Polarity has to be a positive one with bridge A running (not in a Rin 80k
regenerative state).
equal to 250V. Polarity has to be a positive one with bridge A running (not in Rin 300k
a regenerative state).
24 ENABLE: Drive operation command enabling. The signal is active when the Iin 9mA
terminal is short-circuited with +24V (terminal 40). The contact related to this
terminal, shown in the SIGNAL CONNECTIONS diagram, consists of a NO
auxiliary contact of contactor KM energizing the drive power section.
See Note (1).
25-27 MDO 1: Digital output 1 to be configured through parameter P170 5A / 250VAC
(MDO1Cfg). 5A / 30VDC
Default configuration: 0:Drive OK.
26 START: Enabling of the speed / voltage references or current references to be Iin 9mA
found on analog inputs REF, IN 1, IN 2, IN 3 (summed up to the reference
from serial connection, field bus and UpDownRef internal variable), or
enabling of one of the run preset references. The signal is active when the
terminal is short-circuited with +24V (terminal 40). When the contact on
terminal 26 opens, a ramp down is set starting from the current speed /
voltage signal. The ramp down time is set in parameter P034 or P035. See
RAMPS OVER REFERENCE chapter for the inequality relations assuring that the
times set for the stop ramps in par. P034 and P035 are exactly respected.
28 MDI 1: Digital input 1 to be configured through parameter C130 (MDI1Cfg). Iin 9mA
Default configuration: 0:Reset.
Default configuration: 1:SpeedThreshold.
Default configuration: 12:JogA.
Default configuration: 13:JogB.
Default configuration: 2:Iarm Threshold.
Default configuration: 1:Preset Speed A.
58/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL

Default configuration: 4:Clim.
Default configuration: 5:Drive Running.
Default configuration: 5:Reverse.
40 +24V (OPTO): +24V main voltage supply output for digital inputs operation +24VDC
and/or to supply the encoder. It is optoinsulated from the 0V signal of analog 200mA max
inputs.
Default configuration: 4:CurrLimitation.
42 0V(OPTO): Negative terminal of +24V external supply voltage (if any) to -
supply the control section and/or the encoder. It is optoinsulated from the 0V
signal of analog inputs. If the digital inputs come from the static outputs of a
PLC, 0V of the PLC is to be connected to this terminal.
44 +24V(EXT): Input for positive terminal of +24V external supply voltage to +24VDC / 2A max
supply the control section.
(1) Note.
1a DRIVE LOCK WHILE STOPPING.

Suppose C051 is set at 1:Predictive=>J1 value. In that case, even after the START contact to terminal 26 is
open and the motor fall ramp is over, if the ENABLE contact to terminal 24 is kept closed, the drive
regulates zero current (no torque is generated), i.e. the drive is still operating, although the motor is
idling.
While the motor is not running (idling), if for some particular reasons contactor KM has to remain closed
for a long time, for the operators safety it is possible to wire an additional contact to terminal 24; such
contact is to be series connected to auxiliary contact NO of contactor KM. If this contact opens, the current
reference will be set to zero, and the drive will be disabled (motor idling, drive in stand-by).
On the other hand, in case parameter C051 is set at 0:PI operating, the drive will automatically inhibit any
firing pulse as soon as the motor down ramp is over. The motor keeps idling.
1b MOTOR NEUTRAL
If a rotating motor controlled by the drive is to be put in neutral, the contactor is recommended not to be
opened. First open the above-mentioned additional contact (which is to be previously wired to terminal 24,
series connected to auxiliary NO contact of contactor KM), then open contactor KM.
1c CLOSING THE ENABLE CONTACT WHEN THE MOTOR IS IDLING.

When the connected motor is idling and the ENABLE contact is closed but the START contact is open, the
system sets the ramp set for par. P034 (RampStopPos) or par. P035 (RampStopNeg) up to zero speed. The
connected motor keeps idling.
59/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
3.30 LEDS AND TEST POINTS ON CONTROL BOARD

The following is a list of visual indications provided by the LEDs installed on control board ES800 (ES906).
The voltage values of the test points on the same board are also stated.
LEDs:
OP1 (green) S8 heatsink switch closed
OP5 (green) SA bridge A active
OP6 (yellow) SB bridge B active
OP7 (green) RUN drive running
OP8 (yellow) LIM drive in current limitation
OP27 (green) S0 Terminal 24 connected to +24V OPTO (ENABLE)
OP28 (green) S1 Terminal 26 connected to +24V OPTO (START)
OP29 (green) S2 Terminal 28 connected to +24V OPTO (MDI1)
OP35 (green) SC Contact at terminals 25-27 closed (MDO1)
OP36 (green) SD Contact at terminals 29-31 closed (MDO2)
OP37 (green) SE Contact at terminals 33-35 closed (MDO3)
OP38 (green) SF Contact at terminals 37-39 closed (MDO4)
OP39 (green) SG Contact at terminals 41-43 closed (MDO5)
OP40 (green) STX active serial transmission to keypad
TEST POINTS:
TS3 (dia 2.1) GND 0V
TS6 (dia 1.2) H0OUT armature current (+2.5V at 100%)
TS8 (dia 1.2) VAR armature voltage (0V +5.0V with 665V +665V)
TS9 (dia 1.2) VAC mains voltage (+3.0V approx. with 380VAC)
TS38 (dia 1.2) AN0 tacho generator (4.5V at 100%)
TS46 (dia 1.2) CHB channel B of encoder (digital signal 0-5V)
TS47 (dia 1.2) CHA channel A of encoder (digital signal 0-5V)
TS59 (dia 1.2) +5V +5V digital (referred to GND)
TS60 (dia 1.2) +5VOP +5V optoinsulated for encoder (referred to OP)
TS61 (dia 1.2) OP 0V reference for +5VOP and +A
TS62 (dia 1.2) +A +24V optoinsulated (referred to OP)
60/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
3.31 FEEDBACK FROM ENCODER

For the encoder connection, the following may be used:
1. The M1 screw double terminal board with 44 terminals.
2. The CN2 9-pole D-connector.
In both cases, all the available input channels and supply values are optoinsulated with respect to the
analog inputs potential. When choosing the encoder type, check the max. speed frequency, that may be
pulses / rev nmax
obtained from the following formula fmax = , where pulse/rev is the encoder number of
60
pulses for each complete rotation and nmax is the max. rotation speed expressed in rev/min.
Using the screw terminal board.

In the first event the features of the encoder to be connected are the following:
1a. Complementary push-pull encoder or NPN-type or Open Collector
2a. High level of the output waveform on the three channels equal to 24VDC max
3a. Input maximum frequency equal to 102.400kHz (e.g. 1024 pulse/rev for 6000 RPM max.)
4a. 5Vdc or 24Vdc voltage available for encoder supply through DCREG drive
The following terminals should be used:

14 - Input for channel A 15 - 5VDC supply output
16 - Input for channel B 42 - 0V
12 - Input for channel N (1) 40 - 24VDC supply output
The encoder screened cable shield should be connected to the ground potential as directly as possible. Use
one of the 3 collar-shaped cable fasteners located on the bottom of the control board supporting guard.
Using the D-connector.

In the second case the features of the encoder to be connected are the following:
1a. Line-driver encoder (RS422 output standard)
2a. High level of the output waveform on the six channels ranging from 5...15Vdc
3a. Max. input frequency equal to 102.400kHz (e.g. 1024 pulse/rev for 6000 RPM max)
4a. 5Vdc or 24Vdc encoder supply through DCREG drive
The following D-connector pins should be used:

pin 1 - Input for channel A pin 6 - Input for channel N (1)
pin 2 - Input for channel A pin 7 - 5VDC supply output
pin 3 - Input for channel B pin 8 - 0V
pin 4 - Input for channel B pin 9 - 24VDC supply output
pin 5 - Input for channel N (1)
In this case, it is not necessary to use one of the three collar-shaped cable fasteners located on the bottom
of the control board supporting guard to connect the screened cable shield of the encoder to the ground
potential, unless a screened 9-pole flying male connector is used. Said connector is to be assembled inside
a screening metal body:
ITT-CANNON mod. DE121073-154 (connector body) + n.2 250-8501-013 (pair of long fastening
screws).
FRAMATONE mod. 8655 MH 09 01.
In that way, the ground potential on 90 female connector in board ES801(ES906) will be transmitted to
the metal body, then to the screened cable shield connecting the encoder.
The connector body is supplied by ELETTRONICA SANTERNO (code CN0420000), as well as 9-pole D-
connector (code CN0400018).
(1) This is not required for the speed feedback, but is required for the position control.
61/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
3.32 MILLIAMPERE INPUT / OUTPUT SIGNALS

It is possible to feed an analog input as an mA signal to terminals 5 / 7 (REF) or terminals 11 / 13 (IN 1):
if current enters terminal 5 and goes out from terminal 7, or if current enters terminal 11 and goes out
from terminal 13, the internally generated signal is positive by default.
Similarly, it is possible to obtain an analog output as an mA signal from terminal 8 (OUT 1) or terminal 10
(OUT 2): said signal, that may be only outgoing towards 0V, is obtained by an internally generated signal
which is positive by default.
1. INPUT SIGNALS
Between signal Iin in mA, which is externally applied, and signal VRL in Volt, which is internally generated in
the load resistance terminals, the following relation is applied:
Iin =20mA VRL =4V
The Gain and Bias functions (and the Polarity and Reverse following functions) may be applied to signal VRL
before generating the TermRef reference displayed by parameter M014 (or signal AnIn1 displayed by
parameter M010), according to the formula below:
Gain Bias
Term Re f ( AnIn1) = VRL + 10
100 100
With the default values of the relevant parameters, the final matching between Iin and TermRef(AnIn1) is the
following:
Iin =0mA TermRef(AnIn1)=0V

Iin =4mA TermRef(AnIn1)=0.8V
Iin =20mA TermRef(AnIn1)=4V
The table below shows the values to be assigned to the different parameters relating to the Gain and Bias
functions in order to obtain a given percentage of internal reference TermRef(AnIn1), with 100%
corresponding to 10V, starting from external signal Iin in mA. The table assumes that the parameters
relating to the Polarity function (parameter P120 and P126) are at their default value and that the Reverse
function is not applied.
Jumper JP8 in ES801

Jumper JP7 in ES801 (JP407 in ES906)
(JP408 in ES906)
in pos. 2-3
in pos. 2-3
Iin M014 (M010)
REF [Terminals 5 / 7] REF [Terminals 5 / 7]
IN 1 [Terminals 11 / 13]
Speed / voltage reference Armature current reference
Gain Bias Gain Bias Gain Bias
0...20mA 0...+100% P122=250% P121=0% P125=250% P124=0% P128=250% P127=0%
0...20mA 100%...+100% P122=500% P121=100% P125=500% P124=100% P128=500% P127=100%
4...20mA 0...+100% P122=312.5% P121=25% P125=312.5% P124=25% P128=312.5% P127=25%
4...20mA 100%...+100% P122=625% P121=150% P125=625% P124=150% P128=625% P127=150%
62/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
2. OUTPUT SIGNALS
Between signal AnOut1(2) in Volt, which is internally generated after configuring analog output OUT 1 or
OUT 2 as desired and which is displayed by parameters M019 and M020 respectively, and outgoing signal
Iout in mA, the following relation is to be applied:
AnOut1(2)=10V Iout =20mA
Before generating signal AnOut1(2), the Gain and Bias functions may be used (followed by the Polarity
function) starting from signals Vout1(2) originally configured, according to the formula below:
Gain Bias
AnOut = Vout + 10
100 100
With the default values of the relevant parameters, the final matching between Vout and Iout is the following:
Vout =0V Iout =0mA

Vout =2V Iout =4mA
Vout =10V Iout =20mA
The table below shows the values to be assigned to the different parameters relating to the Gain and Bias
functions to obtain a particular signal Iout in mA, starting from internal signal Vout in Volt. The table assumes
that the parameters relating to the Polarity function (par. P157 and P158) are at their default value.
Jumper JP9 in ES801 (JP409 in ES906) Jumper JP10 in ES801 (JP4010 in ES906)
in pos. 2-3 in pos. 2-3
Vout Iout
OUT 1 [Terminal 8] OUT 2 [Terminal 10]
Gain Bias Gain Bias
0 ... 10V 0 ... 20mA P152 = 100% P151 = 0% P155 = 100% P154 = 0%
0 ... 10V 4 ... 20mA P152 = 80% P151 = 20% P155 = 80% P154 = 20%
10 ... +10V 0 ... 20mA P152 = 50% P151 = 50% P155 = 50% P154 = 50%
10 ... +10V 4 ... 20mA P152 = 40% P151 = 60% P155 = 40% P154 = 60%
63/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
4 KEYPAD AND ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY
4.1 KEYS OPERATING MODALITIES

The drives of the DCREG2 and DCREG4 Series may be equipped with a remotable keypad provided with
an alphanumeric display, including 8 keys and 8 signalling LEDs.
The keypad is not series installed on the drive and is to be delivered separately.
NOTE The remotable keypad kit is to be ordered for the keypad assembly on a
separate panel: see the REMOTABLE KEYPAD chapter.
The 2-line 16-digit backlit LCD display installed in the keypad shows the parameter values, the diagnostic
messages and the values of the quantities processed by the drive. From now on, the term page indicates
the 32 characters that are simultaneously displayed.
The eight keys have the following functions:
- PROG: allows to switch from display mode (fixed cursor) to programming mode (blinking cursor) and
vice versa. So when the cursor is fixed, you may use the scrolling keys to display the different parameters in
sequence. When the cursor is blinking, you may change the value of the current parameter.
- (DEC): allows to decrease either the page number or the value displayed inside the current page,
depending on which mode you selected with the PROG key, i.e. depending on the cursor state.
- (INC): allows to increase either the page number or the value displayed inside the current page,
depending on which mode you selected with the PROG key, i.e. depending on the cursor state.
- SAVE: in programming mode only, it saves the current value on the page displayed on non-volatile
memory work area (EEPROM), so that the value is kept stored even after turning the drive off and is
displayed at next power on.
64/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
- JOG: is active only when at least one of the sources selected for the commands corresponds to
KeyPad, and when depressed, it enables the jog mode with a reference equal to the one obtained by
enabling digital input JogA.
FORWARD
- : is active only when at least one of the sources selected for the commands corresponds to
REVERSE
KeyPad, and when depressed, it enables the polarity reversal of the Ref n reference applied to the ramps.
- START: is active only when at least one of the sources selected for the commands corresponds to
KeyPad, and when depressed, it enables a self-retained run command, with a reference equal to the one
obtained by enabling the START digital input. For the interaction of this key with the START digital inputs
coming from other sources, refer to the Ref n section in the BLOCK DIAGRAM chapter.
- STOP: in general, it is active only when at least one of the sources selected for the commands
corresponds to KeyPad, and when depressed, it enables a stop command, just as if digital input START was
disabled. For the interaction of this key with the START digital inputs coming from other sources, refer to the
Ref n section in the BLOCK DIAGRAM chapter. In addition, even though none of the sources selected for
the commands corresponds to KeyPad, this key may have the STOP function by setting par. C103
(EmergStop) to 0:Included.
When operating, the drive uses the current parameter set, i.e. the parameters
available at the moment. The parameter that has been updated with the
NOTE and keys will be immediately used instead of the previous parameter,
even if it is not saved with the SAVE key. The new value will not obviously be
stored when the drive is turned off.
For a simpler use of the drive, the following command shortcuts are available:
- ALARM RESET: Press the PROG and SAVE keys simultaneously to close a digital input configured as
0:Reset for an alarm reset. Of course, the alarm will be cancelled once the cause responsible for its trip has
disappeared.
- QUICK PAGE SHIFT (MONITOR function): Press the and keys simultaneously to access the
page relating to parameter P000 (Key). Press and again to access the Keypad page relating to
parameter M000 (Vref) and to other measure parameters selected through parameter P005 (FirstParm)
and P006 (MeasureSel). Press and for the third time to display the Status page. By pressing both
keys once again, the operator may return to the page where the prior keys had been pressed.
- LOCAL MODE SWITCHING for commands and references : Press the and SAVE keys
simultaneously to switch to LOCAL mode for the drive commands (digital inputs) and references. Switching
is enabled only when parameter C100 (LocRemSel) is set at value 0:Enabled with the drive disabled, i.e.
not running. Whenever the drive is turned on, it will directly switch to the operating mode previously saved
on EEPROM. Therefore, the LOCAL mode status enabled by pressing the and SAVE keys is not
included among the variables that can be saved on EEPROM.
65/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
The diagram below shows the sequence of the pages displayed through the MONITOR function (the
and keys are simultaneously pressed). For a better understanding, let us suppose to start from the
page relating to par. P010 (nFdkMax) the current page in the diagram. The diagram also shows that the
Keypad page is also displayed by simultaneously pressing the and SAVE keys (LOCAL mode only, as
explained in the LOCAL MODE OPERATION chapter).
P010 nFdbkMax P000 Key

3000 RPM 1:Program Enable
current page Key page
Drive OK D4.01 Vref 14.5 %

DCREG4.100 P440 ****
Status page Keypad page
SA
VE
4.2 FUNCTIONS DISPLAYED BY THE LEDS

The eight LEDs located on the alphanumeric display have the following functions:
- The RUN LED is on when the drive is running (i.e. when the firing board sends pulses). This LED
blinks during the fall ramp programmed in parameters P034 (RampStopPos) or P035 (RampStopNeg) after
disabling the START digital input. When this LED is on, the RUN LED in control board ES800 (ES906) is on
as well.
- The REF LED may have the following two functions:

a) If at least one reference among ref n reference applied to the ramps and one of the three auxiliary
references IN 1, IN 2, IN 3 is configured as a speed reference, then the LED will turn on when the speed
reference is other than zero, even when the motor is not started.
b) If no reference among ref n reference applied to the ramps and the three auxiliary references IN 1, IN 2,
IN 3 is configured as a speed reference, but at least one of them is configured as a current reference, then
the LED will turn on when the current reference is other than zero even if the motor is not started.
- The FORWARD and REVERSE LEDs indicate the direction of rotation of the motor when it is on; the
forward direction is the one obtained by generating a motor torque with a positive reference. When the
motor is not yet running, the FORWARD LED will flash if the prepared run reference has a positive polarity,
whereas the REVERSE LED will flash if the prepared run reference has a negative polarity.
the reference polarity indication supplied by LEDs REF, FORWARD and REVERSE
WARNING when the drive is not yet running, do not consider any additional speed or
current references.
- The LOC SEQ LED is on if the sources selected for the commands are KeyPad-related, it flashes if
another source different than KeyPad is selected, while it is off if none of the sources selected for the
commands is KeyPad-related.
66/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
- The LOC REF LED is on if the sources selected for the references are UpDownRef-related only, it
flashes if another source different than UpDownRef is selected, while it is off if none of the sources
selected for the references is UpDownRef-related.
- The BRAKE LED indicates that the electrical braking, or in general the energy regeneration from the
load to the mains, is on.
- The I LIMIT LED indicates that the drive is in current limit. When this LED is on, ILIM LED in control
board ES800 (ES906) is on as well.
4.3 LOCAL OPERATING MODE

As we stated above, the Main Ref can result from the sum of max. four sources:
1. Terminals (Terminal Ref)
2. Up / Down internal reference (UpDown Ref)
3. Serial connection (Serial Link Ref)
4. Field bus (Field Bus Ref)
Similarly, the command sequences (digital inputs) can be simultaneously entered through three sources
selected among the four available sources:
1. Terminals (Terminal Digital Input)
2. Keypad (KeyPad)
3. Serial connection (Serial Link Digital Input)
4. Field bus (Field Bus Digital Input)
MIXED mode: whenever the drive is turned on, the active operating mode depends on the values stored on
EEPROM for parameters C105 C108 (RefSelx) and parameters C110 C112 (SeqSelx). The active
mode may be inferred by the state of LEDs LOC REF and LOC SEQ. Therefore, Main Ref can result from the
sum of all four available sources, whereas the command sequence (digital inputs) can be simultaneously
entered through max. three of the four sources.
LOCAL mode only: if the and SAVE keys are simultaneously pressed - if par. C100 (LocRemSel) is
set at 0:Enabled - the drive will operate in LOCAL mode only for references and commands (i.e. digital
inputs). Therefore, only one selected source is available for the reference, equal to UpDownRef, and only
one source available for the commands equal to KeyPad will be simultaneously selected. In this way, the
run / stop commands may be set only through keypad by pressing the START and STOP keys. In
addition, the jog run may be set only by means of the JOG key, according to the reference value equal
to the one obtained by enabling digital input JogA. The polarity reversal of the Ref n reference applied to
the ramps may be obtained by pressing the
FORWARD

REVERSE
key only.
When this mode is programmed, the display will automatically show the KeyPad page, relevant to par.
M000 (Vref) and to other parameters selected through par. P005 (FirstParm) and P006 (MeasureSel). The
programming mode is already active (as if par. P000 were set at 1:Program Enable). This means that the
UpDownRef reference value can be changed by pressing the increment and decrement keys. When the
KeyPad page is displayed, the programming mode is always active, even though the operating mode is not
the LOCAL mode only. If no source is selected for the UpDownRef reference, the KeyPad page allows to
read the prepared reference only. When the and SAVE keys are pressed again, current values for
parameters C105 C108 (RefSelx) and parameters C110 C112 (SeqSelx) will be reset.
67/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
4.4 KEYPAD REMOTE CONTROL

The keypad remote control kit includes the following:
1. N.1 panel-front frame.
2. N.1 stick-on rubber gasket.
3. N.1 RJ45 extension cord (L = 5m).
4. N.4 M3 self-locking nuts.
5. N.4 M3 flat washers.
To remove the keypad from the drive and to install it on a control panel front, follow the instructions below.
If the keypad is not installed on the equipment (standard supply), ignore steps c, d, e.
Before following the instructions below, turn off the equipment to avoid
WARNING
damaging it.
A. Loosen the flat-head screw fastening the keypad covering frame.

B. Remove the panel (with the screw still in).
A B
C. Insert a screwdriver in the hole for the release of connector RJ45, which is connected to the keypad
(see instructions on the keypad label).
D. Keep the screwdriver pressed (so that the retaining tab of connector RJ45 is unfastened) and extract
the keypad.
C D
68/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
E. The keypad is removed.

F. Extract the wire by pressing on the connector tab.
E F
G. Insert the keypad frame again. Fasten with the proper screw.
H. Connect an end of the keypad extension cord to the connector installed on the DCREG.
G H
I. Insert the other end of the cord in the connector installed on the keypad rear part.
J. Remove the film from the stick-on label and apply it on the keypad front part.
I J
69/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
K. Make the panel holes for the frame assembly.

L. Fasten the keypad using the nuts and flat washers supplied with the kit.
92
90
= =
=
109 92
=
N 4 holes
4 M00083-B
K L
70/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
5 FIRMWARE STRUCTURE
5.1 GENERAL
The drive control firmware is to be found in FLASH U20 of control board ES800 (ES906); its software
version (Dx.xx) is displayed by the Status page, whereas the users parameters may be saved on EEPROM
U11 in the same board. Both components are located beneath the metal support of the keypad. EEPROM
U11 is assembled on a 4+4 pin socket to be easily removed when required.
The software version installed may also be read on the two seven-segment displays installed on control
board ES800 (ES906) by pressing the PRO key on the board located beneath the two displays. For
instance, digit 36 stands for software version D3.06.
The parameter storage on EEPROM U11 may be checked - when the machine is not running - by pressing
the CPU RESET key for a while (said key is to be found on control board ES800 (ES906) beside the PRO
key) which is equivalent to temporarily switching off the control board.
WARNING Never press the CPU RESET key if the machine is running.
The user may interact with the parameters contained in the M, P, C, A and W menus.
Mxxx parameters are read-only parameters; the user cannot interact with them.
Parameter P000 is the key-parameter containing the access codes allowing to modify any other Pxxx and
Cxxx parameters. Cxxx parameters, unlike Pxxx parameters, may be changed only when the ENABLE digital
input is not active. All said parameters allow the system to be completely configured; some of them are
changed during the auto tuning stages.
Also Axxx parameters are read-only parameters; they are displayed when an alarm trip is stored. The last
two digits related to the alarm tripped will blink and will be displayed on the two 7-segment displays
assembled on control board ES800 (ES906).
Also Wxxx parameters are read-only parameters. They contain some warning messages that do not imply
the drive lock - unlike the alarm messages above. The last two digits of the alarm tripped will remain fixed
and will be displayed on the two 7-segment displays assembled on control board ES800 (ES906).
71/192
72/192
5.2 BLOCK DIAGRAM
MANUAL
USER
15P0059B3
Terminal Ref
ENABLE
n loop add.ref
Serial link Ref Main Ref _____ __ Main Ref X 1 ~
Preset Ref
~
. 1
Ref n
11
Field Bus Ref
+ n feedback
Jog Ref (tacho)(armature)(encoder) I
UpDown Ref I
I
0 Main Ref f) Refn I 11 Varm 9

I
VoHage loop
i-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------J
~~~ \'
I
I
Verr SLAVE
I +
~ I
,
L-
I Ref
' .. ----~---.. ...
nom BEMF+
,__.,
I loop add.ref
.. ,
+
-( Armature
BEMF
Q
Field =
z
01Ref 0 Current loop 0 Field loop
!iii
~.
II
M00708-0
f) Analog In/Out Cl) Digital in/Out
DCREG4
DCREG2
1 - Main Ref
DCREG4
DCREG2
V ref V ref V ref
Gain Bias Pol
SpdloopSel
3:/ref=Vref
REF+
TermRef
I M~141
~n
I. ~~
I Terminal I 1= 1
Ref Sel x
REF-
~
I ref
Gain
~
I ref
Bias
~
I ref
Pol
Serial Link
~-

SLRef
IM~151
l
(Serial Link~ ~~
C105 ...108
I
=0
f: 3
,,
UpDnRefMem
UpDnRefPol -
UpDnRef
~n
I
Gl . . .
~ Ill
UpDown Ref
I M~131 ~ h=o ___
II
UpDnRefRamp
'\.,_ 1
IP~O I
~ ~--------------._------------~ =2
nnnn
_RillUL Du
8---- OFF
LOC SEQ !BLINK
ON
/BLINK ON ---- 8
= 14 (15)
, I LOC SEQ M00709-0
I I
IC130 ...1351
MDixCfg
( ~ )( 'V )
14(15):Up(Dn)
73/192
15P0059B3
MANUAL
USER
74/192
2 - Ref n
MANUAL
USER
15P0059B3
,r-:,,
Jog Ref MDixCfg
5:Reverse ENABLE
IC130 ... 1351
I (**) nMax(Min)Pos(Neg)
LOC SEQ =5 Spd Dmnd Pol
G--- OFF
0 ! BLINK
ON OFF
! BLINK
y -----8
ON
LOC SEQ
! BLINK Ip~~~21 / ..
Vref
5 -~
Main Ref
REF-JOG
~ - ~--~ 1
IMfOO I
=1 ... 3
)( ,--- -----
Preset Ref
SEQ ~ (***) :
:--- ~---~
REF \'
Keypad
STOP =
z
!iii
~.
( START 18 START
(***)
M00710-0
II
START PRESET JOG MOOO
0 0 0 MAIN REF
(**) 0 0 1 JOG REF
SLDgln [S] ~ 1- r- 0- 'PRESET REF
Keypad
0 1 1 JOG REF
FBus Start 1 0 0 MAIN REF
Term/Siink/FBus 0 - f- 1- ~NREF
i
1
1 0 PRESET REF
Mf31 I START
VRefsign
Reversal
1
1 1 1 PRESET REF
FBDgln [S]
DCREG4
DCREG2
3 - Voltage loop
DCREG4
DCREG2
Jog Select MDix Clg An lnx Cig Spd Dmnd Pol
V err Offset
RampUp(Dn)(Stop)Pos(Neg) 7:Ramps0isabled 1:n loop add.ref
IP221 ' P030 ... 0391 I P~121
_L__. I
Rein
An Outx ~~g~:~L ___ f

-1'\ ' .
'I'
Verr
Clg = 7
: Ramped V ref : I P240 I
t'~~~~~~~~~J I
I P012 ...0161
' --- ------- - Low Pass Const
,,
C123 I Spd Dmnd Pol
nMax(Min)Pos(Neg)
Tach Const
~
nFdbk Verr
DT
I M001 I
25Vmax
20
Jl
DT
80Vmax
DT
250Vmax
:__]
=1 )
V arm Max
11 1
n Fdbk Select
I C070 I
t
, An Outx
I
Clg =2
r---- Y- ____ _
I
Gl . . .
~ Ill
23
II
: Speed Error :
1 t- ---- - ---- -
-~ ~ i r An Outx
Clg = 8
:--;
t
-Fd-bk---:
, _________ ,!
Rein
t
Varm
~
Varm
CHA +
14 COUNTER + ) nOUT
75/192
CHB 4 M00711-0
15P0059B3
16
MANUAL
USER
76/192
4- I Ref
MANUAL
USER
15P0059B3
+V
Spdl oopSel
Kp(Ti)Speed(Adapt)(2)
AdaptCtrl Verr1(2)
TiRampScale
T2 I nom xth-Quad
(ES800) llim1(2)A(B)SpeedHyper1 (2)
Clim OverlimA(B)
T FuiiOvlim
MDixCfg
;r 3 6:Stave Enabled Iref
~
I M~o31
=3 =4
\'
=
Mn
Rein I ref
An Outx
Cfg =3
An Outx
Cfg=4 z
+ ,- - - - --~- - - - --
: Speed LoopOUT :
l-------------
:-- c~~r~~~ f:l~l. - - 1
, _____________ , !iii
~.
----Moo-:..-:
An lnx Cfg
2:1/oop add.ref
=2
:
Cfg =4:
Curr :
Limitation '
--------------1
I
II
r--------------
MDOx :
W
I
I
:
:
Cfg =
Full :
Over Limit '
------ - -------~
6:
I
M007120
DCREG4
DCREG2
5 - Current loop
DCREG4
DCREG2
ENABLE
dl / dt Max MFreq
lA
A1._..
,,
Digln [E)
~
I
Gl . . .
~ Ill
lOUT
II
An Outx An Outx __ _
r-----------
:Armature Curr. :
Cfg =9 ctg = 11 ; Mol~r-Torque _
:__________ i
l-----------
, -~ -)r'----------
o-ulp~t F>~~~~:
-
POut
M00713-0
77/192
...Varm
15P0059B3
MANUAL
USER
78/192
6 - Field loop
MANUAL
USER
15P0059B3
lfldNom, BaseSpeed, BaseVarm,
FldEcoLevei(Delay), lfldMinlim,
FldFrcLevei(Time)
,. ---------Moox-:
Cfg =7:
1co10 ... o1sl Fld
I
:
BaseVarm I
.
______________
Weakening:..
+
1
I M017 I
I I
BEMF
I
IC120... 1221 = 11
Ao lmC
I RefFid
I
M007
MOo!>
Cfg =5
11cRd.'"ff.Hm
\'
\ >1-s~~kEMF-:
' - - - - - - - - - - _I
=
z
!iii
~.
II
I fld
FIELD M00714-0
CT F2
Field
DCREG4
DCREG2
7 - Analog In/Out
DCREG4
DCREG2
r------------------
Anln1 - -------------
An ln1- ------------------
Anln 1 ---------------- - --- -- ----------- ------------------- - --- --------------- - ----------- ~
AN IN 1 + Gain Bias Pol 5~RDix Cfg
. everse rFORWARDl
-- - -
An Inx :
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
. ON-----8
An lnxCfg ! BLINK LOC SEQ
1:n loop add. ref x~
~
~~i;;l ~
13 ~
(n = 1, 2)
AN IN2 . 11>1 -\-~
)
l
T~~:;IJ:J~
A~g
=n I
1'
n =n; '
,,
AN IN3 . ~>1 -\-~
---- ~ X~
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
i
(n=3 .. .11)
I
I
I
Gl . . .
~ Ill
-An-outx-.
:----------------- - ----A~ ou~1--
'
=n
Cfg
P1 50
An-
Gain
0~~-1--------- -;..~ 0~~1---------- A~ 0~1 -------------------
~. ~~ ~M~191
Bias Pol An0ut1
II
~-- ANOUT1
8
An Outx An0ut2 An Out2 An Out2 An Out2
M00715-0
J:L-
=n Cfg Gain Bias Pol An0ut2
IP1531 IM~20 I
~-- ANOUT2
79/192
10
15P0059B3
MANUAL
USER
80/192
8 - Digital In/Out
MANUAL
USER
15P0059B3
,-- - ---------------------------~
1
I MDI1 Cfg MDIX : I
I
I
I
=n fr'1'1nl I
I
I X-:~ ~ ~ I
I
I
MDI1 "') ~ I
I
I
I
. __:{ MDI2 Cfg
28 ~IC131l
X--. ~
MDI3
32 1 MDI4 Cfg
X--. ~
\'
MDI6 X)~
1
/
_n MDI6Cfg =
z
!iii
I
~.
II
I 1
I
I
I 38
l--- --
M00716-0
I
DCREG4
DCREG2
I
I
I
-----
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
5.3 PARAMETER COPY

The parameters defined by the firmware can be written and read by the four memory areas of control
board ES800 (ES906):
a. Flash U20, containing the default factory setting of all parameters.

b. RAM U21, containing the parameters used when the drive is on.
c. Work area of EEPROM U11, where the user parameters may be stored.
d. Backup area of EEPROM U11, where the user parameters may be copied for safety reasons.
We adopted any measure (namely the serial communication for EEPROM U11) to prevent the values stored
for the different parameters from being changed due to disturbance or transients. At the same time, a set
of alarms and warnings will trip and suggest the reader how to retrieve the correct data.
The diagram below contains the sequence of the automatic controls performed when the equipment is
turned on.
Step 3 typically takes place when the drive is turned on. In steps 4 and 5, the parameter original values
may be retrieved following the given instructions. For steps 1 and 2, contact ELETTRONICA SANTERNO.
For a better understanding of the meaning of the different alarms or warnings, please refer to ALARM
PARAMETERS and WARNING PARAMETERS chapters.
81/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
The parameters may be copied by the user as follows.
1. Default parameter restoration. To restore the default parameters, set par.P002 (ParmsCopy) at
1:DefaultRestore and press the SAVE key twice. The users customized parameters are erased, and the
factory settings for parameters Pxxx and Cxxx will be reset in EEPROM work area (except the internal data,
that cannot be accessed by the user).
2. Backup of the stored parameters. To back up the stored parameters, set par. P002 (ParmsCopy) at
2:WorkAreaBackup and press the SAVE key twice. The values stored in the EEPROM work area will be
transferred to the RAM and will be copied on the EEPROM backup area. Before doing this, the equipment
checks the data contained in the EEPROM work area. We strongly recommend to perform this backup once
the equipment is started, when all changes made to those parameters are stored in the EEPROM work area
and written in the special table to be found in the last pages of this manual.
In step 6, the parameter original values may be retrieved following the given instructions.
3. Backup parameter restoration. To restore the backup parameters, set par. P002 (ParmsCopy) at
3:Backup Restore and press the SAVE key twice. The parameters stored in the EEPROM backup area will
be restored in the RAM and in the EEPROM work area, even if new values had been stored. Before doing
this, the equipment checks the data contained in the EEPROM backup area.
In step 7, the parameter original values may be retrieved following the given instructions.
82/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
6 SPECIAL FEATURES
6.1 AUTOMATIC TUNING

The drives of the DCREG2 and DCREG4 series are provided with a particular operating mode, which is
able to recognize the essential characteristics of the motor and load as well, in order to automatically
calculate the optimal parameters to be inserted into the current and speed loops.
The different parameters containing the above mentioned characteristics do already have default values
written in the EEPROM, which normally grant a generally satisfactory operation for the most common
applications of the drive. To better streamline the performances, the AUTOMATIC TUNING procedure can
be performed. This display-assisted procedure is performed off-line at the first set-up of the machine and
whenever necessary (i.e., if the electromechanical characteristics of the machine have changed).
For instance, the following sections refer to the digital commands entered through the terminal board.
The three kinds of automatic tuning are listed below.

Before operating one of the three, the ENABLE contact at terminal 24 and the START contact at terminal
26 must both be open.
1. Current self-tuning. Can be performed only choosing a predictive control for the current loop by means
of the parameter C051 (CurrLoopSel) programmed with value 1:Predictive=>J1. Before doing this, set
jumper J1 from position 1 to position 0. Jumper J1 is located on board ES729/1 (installed inside the
equipment on control board ES728/2).
On the other hand, this self-tuning is not available if for the current loop you choose a proportional-
integral control by means of parameter C051 (CurrLoopSel) programmed at the value 0:P1 operating. This
selection is however recommended in case of a DCREG4 in armature feedback or in case of a DCREG2
and generally in all cases where the resistance torque is much higher than the inertia one, or when the
output bars of the DCREG do not supply a motor but supply a resistive load.
The command is issued by setting parameter P001 to 1:Current through the DEC or INC keys and by
pressing the SAVE key. When the following message Close ENABLE to continue is displayed, close the
ENABLE contact at term. 24 by closing (if not already done) the KM remote switch that supplies the power
section. When the Press SAVE to continue message is displayed, press the SAVE key again. The
autotuning procedure is over when message AutoTune in progress disappears and P001=0 is displayed
again.
The values of parameters P103, P104 are calculated and saved on EEPROM. Moreover, the value of
parameter concerning the armature feedback reading is optimised in such a way that while the drive is off,
parameter M006 (Varm) displays 0V.
N.B. During the self-tuning as above, the alarm A014 (R out of range) can trip if the motor rated current,
set by par. C000, is too low if compared to the drive rated current. Therefore the drive may never be
overdimensioned if compared to the motor, but on the contrary its size must be comparable to or
immediately higher than the motor rated current.
83/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
2. Speed autotuning. This tuning can be performed for whichever choice of current loop operation and is
generally recommended. It can be avoided in case of a DCREG2, of a DCREG4 in armature feedback or
when the inertia torque of the load is variable (i.e. a coiler).
The command is issued by setting parameter P001 to 2:Speed through the DEC or INC keys and by
pressing the SAVE key. When the following message Close ENABLE to continue is displayed, close the
ENABLE contact at term. 24 by closing (if not already done) the KM remote switch that supplies the power
section. When the Press SAVE to continue message is displayed, press the SAVE key again. The
autotuning procedure is over when message AutoTune in progress disappears and P001=0 is displayed
again.
The values of the parameters P070 and P071, or, alternatively, of parameters P076 and P077 are
calculated and saved on EEPROM. Parameters P076 and P077 are calculated instead of the parameters
P070 and P071if the possible digital input, that has been configured by setting one of the parameters
C130C135 to the value 8:SecondParmSet, is closed.
N.b. The speed self-tuning, during which the motor has to physically turn, delivers a positive polarity to the
bar A as compared to bar A2.
Whenever two different sets of speed loop adjusting parameters have been
considered through one of the MDIx configurable digital inputs being set at
NOTE value 8:Second ParmSet, then the speed automatic tuning calculates the
parameters relating to one of the two sets according to the state of the above
mentioned digital input.
3. Autotuning for resistive drop RxI. This autotuning procedure complies with any current loop operation
mode and with any speed feedback.
This procedure, which should always be done, allows to compute the value of par. P088 and saves it on
EEPROM memory. Par. P088 is used to compute the back-electromotive force and displays it in par. M007
(BEMF). Par. P088 value is also used for the armature resistive drop compensation, both for the field
current dynamic regulation in field weakening mode and for the armature feedback (in that case, this is
possible through par. P086, where one of its values per cent is programmed).
This command is entered by setting parameter P001 to 3:RxI by using the DEC or INC keys and by
pressing the SAVE key. When the following message is displayed (Close ENABLE to continue), close the
ENABLE contact at terminal 24 by closing KM power section contactor. When the Press SAVE to continue
message is displayed, press the SAVE key again. The autotuning procedure is over when message
AutoTune in progress disappears and par. P001 = 0 is displayed again.
During the autotuning procedure, the optimisation of the parameter value relating to the armature
feedback reading occurs, so that M006 (Varm) displays 0V when the drive is not running.
84/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
6.2 RAMPS OVER THE REFERENCE

In parameters ranging from P030 to P039, the operator may program the ramp application to the set
reference in order to produce a reference with no value instant variation (discontinuity).
With respect to the references applied when the START input is on, the programmable rise and/or fall
ramps are separate concerning the positive polarity and the negative polarity of the set reference (P030 ...
P033). Some initial/final rounding is also possible either at the beginning of the transient (P038) or at the
end of the transient (P039). In addition, when the START digital input is disabled, two additional fall ramps
may be programmed (stop ramps: P034 and P035), also separate concerning the reference positive
polarity and negative polarity; the initial/final rounding programmed are not applied to the stop ramps.
The figure below shows a possible example of the reference that can be produced by the ramp circuit.
The following inequality is to be verified between the ramp times programmed

in parameter P030 ... P033 and the initial/final rounding times programmed
NOTE P 038 P 039
in parameters P038, P039: + P 030(031)(032)(033 )
2 2
As the figure shows, for each ramp transient (rise ramp or fall ramp transient),
the duration of the ramp really set is equal to the addition of the time
NOTE
programmed in the relevant parameter, of half the initial rounding time and
half the final rounding time.
In order to exactly respect the time set for the stop ramps in par. P034 and
P035, the following equality relations are to be correct:
NOTE P 034 P 035
P 031 ; P 033 .
10 10
Ref
+100%
P032 P033
P038 P038 (UP -) (DOWN -)
P039
P035
P039
P038
P034
P039
P030 P031
(UP +) (DOWN+)
-100%
M00569-0
85/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
6.3 MOTOR POTENTIOMETER

This function allows to use an internal variable as a reference, that can be increased or decreased using a
digital input Up and a digital input Down or using the arrow keys.
1. Reference. At least one of the sources selected for the reference through parameters C105 C108
(RefSelx) must correspond to UpDownRef; therefore, the LOC REF LED is to be on or flashing.
In the standard use of the Motor Potentiometer function, this source is the one selected to form the main
reference (Main Ref), and the reference obtained will be normally configured as a speed reference, even
though it can be configured as a current reference.
2. Increase / decrease commands. The UpDownRef internal reference may be increased or decreased
using the commands coming from max. three sources among the four available sources that can be
selected through parameters C110 C112 (SeqSelx). The terminal, serial connection or field bus
commands may be used after configuring one of parameters C130 C135 (MDIx) as 14:Up and 15:Dn,
or the and keys. If an increase command is simultaneously entered with a decrease command,
the former will cancel the latter and vice-versa. Two contemporary increment / decrement commands have
the same effect as a single command.
3. Ramps over the increment / decrement commands. Whenever an increment / decrement command is
enabled, the internal reference is increased or decreased according to the ramp set through par. P040
(UpDnRefRamp). When the motor is running, that ramp is in series with the ramp with the Ref n reference,
which is determined by parameters P030 P033, so the ramp obtained is the longer one.
4. Polarity. Par. P250 (UpDnRefPol) allows to program whether the internal reference may range from -
100 +100% or whether it may vary between the values with sign - or +.
5. Storing the last reference set. In order to keep the last value stored at each power on or in case of
power failure, set par. P251 (UpDnRefMem) to 1:Yes. Otherwise (0:No setting) the internal reference will
restart from zero.
6. Reference reset. The internal reference value may be set to zero at any time by enabling the digital input
set to 14:UpDnRefReset through one among par. C130 C135 (MDIx). In that case, the internal
reference is set to zero with no ramps. If a reset command is simultaneously sent with an increase or
decrease command, the reset command has priority.
86/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
6.4 CURRENT LIMITATION

The parameters ranging from P050 to P062 variably control the max. current to be supplied to the load.
The figure below shows a possible programming for current limit I lim A(B) depending on speed n and
resulting from the combination of the different configuring modes. The figure refers to converter DCREG4;
the parameters in brackets relate to bridge B.
I lim A(B)
k P050(51)
(k=C000 Imax[T2])
k P052(53)
k P055
n0 P010 P054 P010 P057 P010
P010 P056
As the figure shows, in the calculation for the current limit, the major value which all other parameters are
related to is the k one, equal to product C000Imax[T2] standing for the rate of motor C000 nominal
current less any trimmer hardware limitation (IMAX[T2]). As we discussed above, for the drive normal use,
the IMAX[T2] value is to be at 100%, i.e. the Status page must not display warning A002 (Imax [T2] <
100%). Therefore, the parameters shown in the figure represent a value per cent of motor C000 rated
current.
1st Mode: Limit independent of speed

The current limit may be set at P050(51) rate of the motor nominal current.
2nd Mode: Two-value limit depending on speed.

The current limit may be defined as a simple two-value function, i.e. two different P050(51) and P052(53)
rates. They are selected whether speed is respectively higher or lower than P054 rate of P010 max. speed.
3rd Mode: Limit with hyperbolic trend depending on speed.

The current limit may be defined hyperbolically depending on speed:
c
I lim A(B ) =
n n0
In the formula above, n0 is the max. speed rate of the hyperbole vertical asymptote, whereas c is the
constant for inverse proportionality.
In the latter mode, you need to program P056 rate for the max. speed enabling the hyperbolic step, P057
rate for the max. speed disabling the hyperbolic step and P055 rate for the motor nominal current at the
end of the hyperbolic step, provided that the motor nominal current rate at the beginning of the hyperbolic
step corresponds to P050(51) value.
87/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
For a better understating, c and n0 values obtained under such conditions are shown below:
P 050 P 055 (P 057 P 056 ) P 050 P 056 P 055 P 057
c= ; n0 =
P 050 P 055 P 050 P 055
The operator may also program P057 = 100%, so that the hyperbolic step ends with P010 max. speed.
When the current limit is defined by overlapping two of the modes above or all the modes above, then the
current limit enabled time after time will be the lower one among the limits relating to each of the modes
applied.
The hyperbolic relation of the current limit with respect to speed is generally used if the motor manufacturer
imposes that when the speed of rotation increases, the max. current to be supplied to the motor is to
increase with a similar law, so as to avoid any switching trouble in the collector.
Another typical application example of the hyperbolic limit is IA

the mixed control of the armature limit current shown in the
figures.
The three figures show depending on speed n the trends
of armature max. current IA, field current IF, max. torque T
and max. power P.
In the first range 0 < n < n1, the motor is in full field and the
armature max. current is kept constant, so the operation is in n
n1 n2 nmax
constant max. available torque mode. The max. allowable
power (as the product of armature voltage by armature
current), increases proportionally and attains its max. level at IF
speed n1.
In the second range n1 < n < n2, the motor is in full field but
the armature max. current decreases hyperbolically, thus
leading the max. torque to decrease with speed. The max.
available power (as a product of torque by speed) is kept
constant, so the operation is in constant max. available
power mode. n
n1 n2 nmax
T
In the third range n2 < n < nmax, the armature current is kept P
constant but the motor is in field weaking mode, so the max.
torque goes on inversely decreasing with respect to speed.
The max. available power (as a product of torque by speed,
or of voltage by current) is kept constant, so the operation is
still in constant max. available power mode.
The current limit value, set at each speed value as we

discussed above, may be increased (overlimit) by the rate n
programmed in parameter P060 and P061, for bridge A n1 n 2 n max
and bridge B respectively. Such limit current increase is M00571-0

permanent, but if a given max. allowable duty-cycle is not
respected for the current required (150% of the rated current for 1min every 10min), alarm A022 (Drive It
Trip) trips.
Finally, the current limit value, set at each speed value as we discussed above, may be decreased using an
external command by enabling a digital input programmed for function 4:Clim. The current limit value
enabled is decreased by the rate programmed in parameter P058.
The value of the current limit, besides being decreased by a set rate, may also be continuously decreased
through one of the configurable analog inputs by setting parameters C120(121)(122) at one of values
8:Ext.curr.lim. ... 10:BrdgB ext.lim.
88/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
6.5 OPERATION QUADRANTS

The operation quadrants are defined in Cartesian coordinates with speed (n) / torque (T). The forward
direction is associated with positive speeds (feedback polarity); bridge A is the one which causes motor
clockwise rotation (seen sideways in the drawing) with no external torque.
The four quadrants may be identified as follows:
1st Quadrant: Forward direction with motor torque (positive speed feedback and bridge A on).
2nd Quadrant: Reverse direction with braking torque (negative speed feedback and bridge A on).
3rd Quadrant: Reverse direction with motor torque (negative speed feedback and bridge B on).
4th Quadrant: Forward direction with braking torque (positive speed feedback and bridge B on).
Parameters C060 ... C063 allow the quadrant enabling / disabling.

Default operation for DCREG2 is enabled for quadrant 1 and 2 (from SW Vers. D4.01). Operation in
quadrant 3 and 4 cannot be enabled (only bridge A is in).
On the other hand, DCREG4 default operation is assigned to all four quadrants (both bridge A and B
are in).
Whenever a braking torque is produced, an energy regeneration takes simultaneously place from the load
to the mains.
What we said above is shown in the following figure, where we suppose that the motor is fit to the axle of a
reel winding or unwinding some tensioned material.
s s
T T
2nd Quad.: REVERSE BRAKE 1st Quad.: FORWARD MOTOR
s s
T T
3rd Quad.: REVERSE MOTOR 4th Quad.: FORWARD BRAKE

M00572-B
89/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
The figure below shows all operating features of drive DCREG2.
Any equipment for the control of a motor may perform either a speed or a torque control.
In the four cases below, DCREG2 is used to motorize a winder, an unwinder or an elevator. The driving
motor (if any) is supposed to be controlled by an external device. In the figure below, letter T stands for the
torque direction, whereas letter s stands for the motion direction.
Note that default operation for DCREG2 is enabled for quadrant 1 and 2 (from SW Vers. D4.01).
Case A. 1st quadrant: tension control while winding. The driving motor controls the material
feeding speed (current limitation must never be attained), whereas the winder motor controls the applied
torque. DCREG2 operates in current limitation mode with a positive speed reference, which is always
higher than the material feeding speed. Otherwise, DCREG2 may directly work with a preset current
reference. The driving motor will generally apply an opposite torque with respect to the material feeding
direction, except when the tension controlled by the winder is very low and the material friction is not
negligible. In this case, the driving motor will have to generate a forward torque as well.
Case B. 1st quadrant: lifting speed control. By default, DCREG2 speed reference is a positive one,
and the weight of the material to lift is to be heavier than the counterweight - but not as heavy as to
determine the drive operation in current limitation mode, thus compromising the forward speed control. If
the material to be lifted was lighter than the counterweight, the motor would be pulled by the counterweight
and would accelerate in a forward direction, while drive DCREG2 would be kept in neutral (zero current).
Case C. 2nd quadrant: tension control while unwinding. The driving motor controls the material
feeding speed (current limitation must never be attained), whereas the unwinder motor controls the applied
torque. DCREG2 operates in current limitation mode with a speed negative reference, whose absolute
value is always lower than the material feeding speed. If the material is to be tensioned when the machine
is standstill, the drive should use a positive forward reference (which will be correct in any other case).
Otherwise, DCREG2 may directly operate with a preset current reference. The driving motor generally
applies a reverse torque - with the same direction as the material feeding. In the unwinder motor, the
torque direction is opposite to the speed direction; as a result, DCREG2 regenerates some energy from the
motor to the supply mains.
Case D 2nd quadrant: speed control while lowering. By default, DCREG2 has a negative
reference; the weight of the material to lower is to be heavier than the counterweight - but not as heavy as
to determine the drive operation in current limitation mode, thus compromising the reverse speed control.
If the material to be lowered is lighter than the counterweight, the motor would be pulled by the
counterweight and would accelerate in a forward direction, while drive DCREG2 would be kept in neutral
(zero current). The torque direction is opposite to the speed direction; as a result, DCREG2 regenerates
some energy from the motor to the supply mains.
90/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
P Quad.: AVANTI MOTORE 1 Quad.: AVANTI MOTORE

1st Quad.: FORWARD MOTOR 1st Quad.: FORWARD MOTOR
s
'---- > s
TRAINO
CAPSTAN
D
AWOLGITORE
WINDER
A . Controllo (limite)di corrente non rigenerativo B . Controllo di velocita avanti non rigenerativo
A . Non regenerative current control (limitation) B . Non regenerative forward speed control
2 Quad.: INDIETRO FRENO 2o Quad.: INDIETRO FRENO

2nc1 Quad.: REVERSE BRAKE 2nd Quad.: REVERSE BRAKE
s <r-------'
TRAINO
D s
CAPSTAN
SVOLGITORE
UNWINDER
C . Controllo (limite)di corrente rigenerativo D . Controllo di velocita indietro rigenerativo

C . Regenerative current control (limitation) D . Regenerative reverse speed control
M00721-0
91/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
6.6 MOTOR HEATING THERMAL IMAGE

DCREG converters software is able to detect the motor rise in temperature. A motor heating, i.e. the rise in
temperature with respect to ambient temperature T(t) = T(t) Tamb of a motor supplied with constant
current I0, follows a curve

t
2
T (t ) = k I 0 1 e

where is the motor thermal time constant and k is a proportional constant with [C / A2] as units of
measure.
We may therefore infer that, once temperature has stabilized, the rise in temperature will be proportional
to the current second power, as it is equal to k I02.
The figure below shows the heating of a motor supposing it is fed with two different current values (I01 and
I02) which are quantified depending on the reference current represented by parameter C001.
T(t)
k I022
I02 > C001

k C0012
k I012
I01 < C001
n
t*
The reference current value programmed in parameter C001 is by default 110% of motor rated current.
Therefore, the rise in temperature is never to exceed the max. allowable temperature, i.e. kC0012
(temperature allowable value when the motor runs regularly with a current equal to C001).
With a current equal to I02, alarm A021 will trip in instant t*.
For the motor overtemperature protection, the correct setting of the thermal time constant value
programmed in parameter C002 (default value is 300s) is then needed.
92/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
6.7 FIELD REGULATOR

DCREG2 and DCREG4 drives are equipped with an internal field regulator that may be used both to set a
field current fixed value and for a dynamic regulation in field weakening mode.
In both cases, the field current reference displayed in par. M017 (RefFld), so the relevant current, may be
assigned the values shown in the figure below.
RefFld
(M017)
Varm<C030
n 0 n 0
Varm>C030
n=0 n=0
C010 C016
C010 C014
Stand-by + Economy Run + Forcing Run Stand-by Stand-by + Economy
t
C018 C015
First case. The dynamic field regulation in field weakening mode is not required. The nominal field current
is set in parameter C010 (IfidNom).
As soon as the run command is sent and for the time set in par. C018 (FldFrcTime) the field forcing
function may be enabled, which increases the field current by the value per cent set in par. C017
(FldFrcLevel) in order to have a temporary torque boost. This will have no effect if the field flux is saturated.
The field forcing will be always disabled, also when the time set in par. C018 is not yet over, if the
armature voltage reaches approx. 66% of the value programmed in par. C030 (VmainsNom).
Once the drive run is over, the economy function may be enabled. This function allows the field current to
be decreased by the value per cent set in par. C014 (FldEcoLevel) as soon as the drive run is over and once
the delay set in par. C015 (FldEcoDelay) is over. This may be useful when an energy saving function is
needed or when the motor temperature is to constantly exceed a min. value (anticondensate function).
If a min. speed of rotation is detected when the drive is not running (motor pulled), the field current will be
brought to the nominal value set by par. C010.
Second case. Another typical use of the field regulator is the dynamic regulation in field weakening mode
depending on the speed change. This may be used to control DC motors designed for operating in the two
constant available max. torque / power sections. Of course, said function may be mixed with the others.
This operating mode may be used both when a relatively large torque is needed (at a low speed) and when
a relatively high max. speed is needed (but with a smaller torque), as for winders or unwinders in tension
control.
93/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
In order to enable this operating mode, the drive starts decreasing the field current when the speed
required increases, so that the back-electromotive force does not exceed the nominal value.
Suppose the motor ratings are the following as far as the field weakening is concerned:
Nominal armature voltage 400V

Nominal field voltage 220V
Nominal field current 9A (with motor at zero speed or with not yet weakened field)
Field weakening starting speed 1000 RPM
Min. field current 1.8A (with motor at its max. speed)
Max. speed 4000 RPM
First, we have to consider that the 220VDC voltage required for the field exceeds max. 205VDC that can be
obtained with a field regulator power supply (terminals E1-2) ranging from 200 to 240VAC, so a voltage
equal or larger than 400VAC is required for said terminals.
As we stated in the chapter concerning the basic start-up procedure, the RxI resistive drop autotuning is to
be performed by setting par. P001 to 3:RxI. Starting from this value and the value of the rated armature,
the drive will estimate the nominal back-electromotive force (max.) to be adjusted.
The parameters below are to be set, supposing a DCREG.350 is used, with a 15A nominal field current:
P010 (nFdbkMax) = 4000 RPM
9
C010 (IfldNom) = 100 = 60% (9A with respect to the drive 15A rated current)
10
1000
C011 (BaseSpeed) = 100 =25% (1000 RPM of weakening starting with respect to max. 4000 RPM)
4000
C012 (VarmNom) = 400V
1 .8
C016 (IfldNom) = 0.75 100 = 15% (75% of min. 1.8A with respect to 9A rated current)
9
The parameters above are required for the field weakening correct operation and the trend with respect of
the field current reference speed displayed in par.M017 (RefFld) is shown in the figure below.
RefFld
M007 = f.c.e.m.
(M017)
( C010 C011)
C010 C016
n
( C011 P010) P010
94/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
The value set in par. C016 (IfldMinLim) represents the min. limit for the field current provided that the drive
is running. We recommend that this limit be never set below the min. current that the regulator will actually
retrieve. Leave a 25% safety margin.
Field value 1.8A at the max. speed is not to be set in any parameters, as it will automatically be retrieved
by the control loop of the back-electromotive force.
Always try to set in par. C016 the min. limit, depending on the field current at the max. speed, as
sometimes the speed of rotation may reach very high levels, which may damage the mechanical parts. For
example, this may occur if the max. speed has been set at a very high level (a wrong terminal has been
connected in case of a tacho feedback, or the setting of transduction constant C072 or CO74 is wrong), or
the motor could be accelerated by an external torque.
In both cases, the field regulator will keep decreasing the field current in order to keep the back-
electromotive force constant and Alarm A010 (Armature Overvoltage) will not trip: thats why C016 min.
value is to be set. If an additional field current decrease is inhibited, Alarm A023 (Ifld Underlimited) trips
and the drive is locked.
The dynamic regulation of the field current in field weakening mode is possible only in tacho or encoder
feedback mode, not in armature feedback mode. If a speed feedback failure occurs, the automatic switch
may be programmed towards the armature feedback by setting par. C155 to 2:Switch to Varm.
In order to keep the speed of rotation approx. constant with the same reference, the max. armature
voltage is to be programmed in par. P011. Always referring to the motor chosen in the example above:
P011 (VarmMax) = C012 (VarmNom) = 400V
95/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
6.8 CONFIGURABLE DIGITAL OUTPUTS

DCREG drive is provided with 5 digital outputs (relay normally open contact). Any output may be assigned
to some configurations: for further details, see the chapter relating to par. P170(176)(182)(188)(194) and
to the others chapters relating to the configurable digital outputs.
Depending on the configuration assigned, every output enables either when a certain logic condition
occurs (e.g. 3:Motor at Speed) or when an analog quantity exceeds a certain level (e.g. 8:Ifld Threshold).
In both cases, the drive may be programmed in order to have a particular delay before enabling or
disabling the digital output.
At the same time, the logic may be defined, i.e. the digital output enabling determines the relay excitation
(so the contact closing) or the relay disexcitation (so the contact opening).
Moreover, if the digital input is to be enabled when an analog quantity exceeds a particular level, the
enabling level and the hysteresis - necessary to avoid any relay high frequency vibration when the relevant
analog quantity is near the level chosen - are to be defined.
For instance, suppose configurable digital output MDO1 is to be enabled when the armature current
reaches 38% of the drive nominal current. A hysteresis is to be entered in said current threshold, equal to
10% of the current level chosen. The output enabling is to have a 10-second delay. The output disabling is
to have a 18 seconds delay.
In order to obtain this, the following setup is required:
P170 = 2:Iarm Threshold

P173 = 38%
P174 = 10%
P171 = 10 s
P172 = 18 s
The first diagram in the following figure shows a possible trend of the time-depending armature current.
The second diagram shows MDO1digital output enabling and disabling. The third and fourth diagram
show the physical state of the contact at terminals 25-27 respectively, provided that the logic setup is the
following:
P175 = 0:Normally Open
or
P175 = 1:Normally Closed.
96/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
Iarm
P173 (38%)
P173 - P174 (28%)
t
15s
the current level
is not lower than
Ilevel - Hysteresys
MDO1
for a time longer
than MDO1Off delay
18s
10s
OFF ON OFF
25
27
P175 = 0 : Normally Open
25
27
P175 = 1: Normally Closed
t
M00660-B
97/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
6.9 SPEED PARAMETER AUTOADAPTATION

When the speed reference value is suddenly changed and the load speed is not able to follow such
variation, the speed loop proportional gain in the transient is to be large enough to avoid any excessive
speed overshot both during acceleration and deceleration. On the other hand, once the speed is constantly
kept at the new value set, said value is generally too high for the speed loop and may cause some
instability.
DCREG allows to enable the SPEED PARAMETER AUTOADAPTATION through par. P082 (AdaptCtrl). This
parameter allows the proportional gain to have a rather high value, selected through par. P073
(KpSpdAdapt) when also speed error value Verr (M002 up to SW Vers. D3.7) is remarkable - so when the
speed value has not yet reached the reference value. When the load speed reaches the new value set, so
the speed error decreases until it becomes null, the proportional gain is gradually reduced until it reaches
the original value set in par. P070 (KpSpeed): the transition between the two values is not sudden but it
gradually occurs between the error value set in par. P083 (Verr1) and the one set in par. P084 (Verr2).
This may be seen in the figure below.
Kp
P073
(KpSpdAdapt)
P070
(KpSpeed)
Verr
P083 P084
(Verr1) (Verr2)
M00658-0
The speed parameter autoadaptation also controls the speed loop integral time. During the transient, the
integral time may be changed starting from the original value set in par. P071 (TiSpeed) up to the new
value set in par. P074 (TiSpdAdapt). In that case as well, the transition between the two values gradually
occurs between the error value set in par. P083 (Verr1) and the one set in par. P084 (Verr2).
Two opposite cases are shown below, requiring an opposite integral time change.
1. Constant-load quick reference change. This may happen with an inertial load, when the drive is in
current limit mode due to a sudden speed reference change.
In that case, to avoid any speed overshot at the transient end, the proportional gain is to be temporarily
increased and the integral time is to be longer, as is shown in the figure below.
Kp Ti
P073 P074
(KpSpdAdapt) (TiSpdAdapt)
P070
(KpSpeed) P071
(TiSpeed)
Verr Verr
P083 P084 P083 P084
(Verr1) (Verr2) (Verr1) (Verr2)
M00659-0
98/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
2. Constant-reference quick load change. This may happen in a machine-tool rotating at a constant speed
when it starts a piece processing.
In that case, to avoid any speed decrease at the transient beginning, the proportional gain is to be
temporarily increased and the integral time is be shorter, as shown in the figure below.
Kp Ti
P073
(KpSpdAdapt)
P071
(TiSpeed)
P070
(KpSpeed)
P074
(TiSpdAdapt)
Verr Verr
P083 P084 P083 P084
(Verr1) (Verr2) (Verr1) (Verr2)
M00657-0
Finally, if a motor has a different mechanical time constant, a different reduction ratio, a different load
inertial moment, and so on, the speed loop regulation parameters it requires are different than the
standard ones.
In that case, the configured digital input is to be closed by setting one of par. C130 ... C135 at 8:Second
ParmSet. The new values of the proportional gain and the speed loop integral time will be the ones
programmed in par. P076 (KpSpeed2) and P077 (TiSpeed2) respectively instead of the original values set
in par. P070 (KpSpeed) and P071 (TiSpeed).
During the transient, the parameter autoadaption function - if enabled - will bring the proportional gain
and integral time values to the new values set in par. P079 (KpSpdAdapt2) and P080 (TiSpdAdapt2)
respectively.
99/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
6.10 ELECTROMAGNETS APPLICATION
6.10.1 D RIVE P OWER C ONNECTIONS A ND P ROTECTING D EVICES

DCREG4 thyristor converter can be used to power very inductive loads, such as electromagnets.
Applications problems due to this type of load - that can be compared to a ohmic resistance series-
connected to a very strong inductance - have been solved by a control algorithm specially developed for
DCREG4 converters.
With very inductive loads, safety problems may occur in case of power failure due to faults in the system or
to unsafe installations. Power failure, in conjunction with the high inductive value of the magnet, can cause
instant over voltage up to some thousands of Volts. The only way to protect the converter from those over
voltage conditions consists in taking special measures when installing the equipment (see sections below).
Over voltage depends on how quick magnet power failure is:
dI
V =L
dt
Because L value is very high (approx. 1 Henry), the voltage value can reach instant values up to some
thousands of Volts.
To protect the converter, the most effective measure consists in installing clamping unit CU400, which
protects a DC converter when it is subject to dangerous over voltage conditions generated when the current
conduction mesh of the magnet unexpectedly opens.
Energy stored in the magnet is obtained as follows:
1
E= LI2
2
Energy in the magnet is absorbed and stored in an RC-type clamping circuit, where over voltage is limited
by a capacitor and energy is dissipated by a resistance, which are both integrated in the clamping circuit.
Clamping unit CU400 must be connected directly to the converter output by means of fuses equipped with
a micro switch detecting power failure.
To ensure proper clamping, unit CU400 must be connected directly to the converter DC side. To suppress
the first current peak generated by the capacitor, this is precharged when connecting the main voltage of
the mains (typically 400 VAC) to the relevant terminals.
(Wiring diagram and terminal board are shown in Figure 1).
If the current conduction mesh on mains side opens (due to sliding contacts or other), or wires connecting
the magnet to the converter are torn, the electric arc generated when current is cut off is limited by the
clamping circuit, ensuring that over voltage does not exceed safety values.
This setting is essential for electromagnets installed on bridge cranes where 3-phase supply voltage L1-2-
3 is derived from the mains through sliding brushes that could accidentally open.
Multiple clamping units CU400 can be parallel-connected to the output of a unique converter. Each
clamping unit is indicated for a rated DC current of approx. 150A as a maximum allowable value.
For more details, see CU400s Instruction Manual.
100/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
EM: Electromagnet FU1-2-3: Ultrafast fuses L: Switching reactance FUC: Fuses 50A gG(gL)
53
EM
54 A1
L3 L3 DCREG4
A2
L2 L2
L1 L1 FUC
FU1-2-3 L
1 B1
4 B2
FIG. 1
Otherwise, if you suppose that over voltage occurs only when the conduction mesh opens on mains side
(3-phase supply voltage L1-2-3 derived from sliding brushes), another protective measure exists.
On mains side, install an autotransformer (see Fig. 2) which ensures current flowing even if one or more
mains phases open.
To ensure the boost function (see below), voltage in the autotransformer secondary circuit should equal 1.5
2 times the rated voltage of the electromagnet.
Apparent power of the autotransformer should be at least 50% stronger than DC power on electromagnet
side. If a real autotransformer is used (not an isolating transformer), voltage in the secondary circuit should
be at least 10 20% weaker than voltage in the primary circuit, so as to avoid installing any switching
inductance.
53
54
DCREG4
EM
L3 L3 A1
L2 L2
L1 L1 A2
AT FU1-2-3
AT: Autotransformer EM: Electromagnet FU1-2-3: Ultrafast fuses
FIG. 2
101/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
Finally, a third protective measure consists in using only a switching reactance on mains side (switching
reactance is shown in Fig. 3).
This is the cheapest solution, but no protection is ensured, because no closing link of the magnet current is
provided in case of power failure or output wire failure.
In that case, SCR modules are damaged by the over voltage caused by the magnet.
53
54
DCREG4
EM
L3 L1 A1
L2 L2
L1 L3 A2
FU1-2-3 L
EM: Electromagnet FU1-2-3: Ultrafast fuses L: Switching impedance
FIG. 3
102/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
6.10.2 DCREG4 E LECTROMECHANICAL D IAGRAM F OR R EFERENCE

S WITCHING
The diagram in Figure 4 illustrates how commands and references are managed both for
magnetization/demagnetisation and for counter-energizing, which is essential to suppress residual
magnetization.
If relays are used instead of a PLC, relays controlled by DCREG4s digital outputs may be equipped with
AC or DC coils, provided that the maximum allowable power value is not exceeded. Because of weak
current values (milliAmperes), use low capacity relays to make sure that contacts properly close.
MDO 2 MDO 3 MDO 4 MDO 5

ENABLE
+24Vcc
START
AnIn 1
MDI 4
MDI 5
MDI 6
+10V
-10V
REF
0V
2 11 3 1 5 24 26 40 34 36 38 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43
RF
PDL
RA RE RC
PI PV
PD PE
RI
RI RC
RE RI RA RF
RE
RE RA RC RF RI LMA
FIG. 4
LEGEND
LMA: Indicator light, magnet on RA: Relay, converter enabling

PD: Button, magnet deenergizing RC: Relay, storage of counter-energizing beginning
PDL: Button, magnet partial deenergizing RE: Relay, storage of energizing/deenergizing commands
PE: Button, magnet energizing RF: Relay, end of cycle storage
PI: Potentiometer, counter-energizing current RI: Relay, current in the magnet on
PV: Potentiometer, energizing voltage
103/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
6.10.3 DCREG4 S ETTING PARAMETER V ALUES D IFFERENT F ROM

D EFAULT V ALUES
P003 = 1 Advanced programming level
P011 = 1.15 x VMAINSnom Boost DC voltage forcing energizing current
P031 = 10 s Down ramp time of positive voltage reference
P034 = 60 s (example) Down ramp during partial demagnetisation
P059 = 0.01 %/s Ramp over current reference
P070 = 1 Proportional gain kp of voltage regulator
P071 = 0.1 s Integral time Ti of voltage regulator
P100 = 1.5 Proportional gain kp of current regulator
P101 = 10 ms Integral time Ti of current regulator (discontinuous operation)
P102 = 100 ms Integral time Ti of current regulator (continuous operation)
V
P122 = nom 100 Gain over REF for magnet rated voltage as a percentage of boost voltage
P 011
P128 = 20% (example) Gain over AnIn 1 for counter-energizing inverse current
P176 = 5 Digital output MDO 2 set as Drive Running
P177 = 3 s (example) Digital output MDO 2 enabling delay for starting boost duration setting
P181 = 1 Digital output MDO 2 set up with normally closed logic
P185 = 5% Current threshold for digital output MDO 3 as a percentage of IDRIVEnom
P195 = 3 s (example) Time period of counter-energizing stage with inverse current
P211 = +100% PresetSpd 1 for boost upon energizing
P212 = -100% PresetSpd 2 for boost upon deenergizing
I
C000 = EM nom 100 Magnet rated current expressed as a percentage of the converter size
I DRIVE nom
C030 = VMAINSnom Three-phase, rated supply voltage for the converter
C070 = 4 Armature feedback
C120 = 10 Auxiliary input AnIn 1 set as current limit for bridge B
C134 = 2 Digital input MDI 5 ready for Preset Speed B setting
C135 = 6 Digital input MDI 6 ready for Slave setting
C150 = 1 Alarm A001 trip disabled (Field current failure)
C151 = 1 Alarm A004 cleared (Load loss)
C153 = 1 Alarm A006 trip disabled (Unstable mains frequency)
C154 = 1 Alarm A007 trip disabled (No supply phase)
C156 = 1 Alarm A010 trip disabled (Output over voltage)
C157 = 1 Alarms A016/17 trip disabled (Tolerance exceeded by mains voltage )
C170 = 1 Selection of inductive load
NOTES
1. Set P000 = 1 to alter the parameters above.
2. Save all changes made to the parameters above. The remaining parameters are expected to be
left at their default values (factory setting).
3. If an oscilloscope is used to monitor the response to a current reference step, temporarily change
the value of parameter C133 from 1: Preset Speed A (default value) to 6: Slave Enabled. If so, the
reference set on potentiometer PV (that must not be set at its max. value to avoid current limit) becomes a
current reference, for the time set in P177. The current waveform may be read on terminal 8 by setting par.
P150 to 9: ArmatureCurr.
104/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
6.10.4 DCREG4 O PERATION D ESCRIPTION

If button PE is pressed, relay RE energizes, self-maintaining.
When PE returns to its initial position, relay RA energizes as well, self-maintaining.
Its contact on terminal 24 for ENABLE closes and the converter starts delivering output voltage. Indicator
light LMA comes on to indicate that the magnet is on.
Closed contact of digital output MDO 2 keeps digital input MDI 4 active on terminal 34 for the time set in
P177; DC output voltage is set (with par. P011 and P211), which is equal to mains 3-phase voltage
increased by 15% (e.g. 460VDC with 400VAC).
Max. positive voltage which may be delivered by the converter with the default value of par. P230 (AlfaMin)
is equal to V = VSUPPLY 1.36 cos Min (approx. +470VDC with 400VAC).
Then, the boost function activates, which considerably reduces the current rise time.
Current will reach the magnet rated value set in C000 within a given time. Even though the max. voltage
reference is kept set for a longer time (par. P177), voltage delivered to the magnet terminal will drop
anyhow (converter in current limit).
As soon as current is other than zero, MDO 3 contact closes, thus energizing relay RI.
If energizing button PE is pressed at any moment, the duty cycle of the equipment is not affected, thanks to
contact NO of RI parallel-connected to contact NC of button PE and to contact NC of RI, which is series-
connected to contact NO of button PE.
When the time set in par. P177 is over, contact MDO 2 opens, and the reference becomes the magnet
rated voltage set in potentiometer PV, whose full-scale value is set in par. P122.
Switching from the max. voltage reference to the rated reference of the magnet, current drops, due to a
larger resistance of the electromagnet winding when this heats up. Otherwise, if boost is set for a too long
time (par.177), once the current rated value is reached, it is kept constant.
If button PDL is kept depressed for a given time, the voltage reference slowly drops following the ramp set
in parameter P034 and unloading the material in excess (partial demagnetisation).
If button PDL is longer kept pressed, the converter shuts off and output voltage drops to zero; to set again
the desired voltage, just release button PDL.
Even if the voltage reference returns to its initial value without following any preset ramp, current will rise
slowly because the boost function is inactive.
If deenergizing button PD is pressed, relay RE deenergizes, and digital inputs MDI 5 (terminal 36) and MDI
6 (terminal 3) are activated: input voltage reference for terminal 5 is then switched to an internal current
reference equal to the max. negative value.
This occurs with the maximum negative voltage that the converter can deliver; with the default value of par.
P231 (AlfaMax) this is equal to V = VSUPPLY 1.36 cos Max (approx. -470VDC with 400VAC). The boost
function enables, which considerably reduces current fall time.
105/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
As soon as current drops to zero, relay RC energizes, self-maintaining. Then, once current conduction
switches from bridge A to bridge B, current becomes negative.
Bridge B is set to current limit due to the low value set through potentiometer PI and sent to auxiliary input
AnIn 1, which is configured as current limit for bridge B through parameter C120. Its incoming signal is
weakened by parameter P128 to exploit the whole scale of the potentiometer.
Current is kept constant for the time set in parameter P195 (residual magnetization is suppressed); when
the time set in P195 is over, contact of digital output MDO 5 closes (MDO 5 is set as current limit
attained by default) and relay RF is energized, self-maintaining.
Contact NC of RF on terminal 24 of ENABLE opens (stand-by command), so current is forced to zero with
the max. positive voltage available applied to the magnet (approx. +470VDC with 400VAC).
When voltage and current cancel out, the converter is really disabled; contact MDO 4 opens and turns off
indicator light LMA.
As soon as current drops below the current threshold, relay RI deenergizes, thus allowing to send a new
energizing command.
When button PE is pressed again, self-maintenance is disabled for relays RA, RC, RF, and the operating
cycle can start again.
NOTE: What explained in the section above concerns loads consisting in only one electromagnet (or in a
fixed number of electromagnets) and loads consisting in a variable number of electromagnets, e.g.
multiple parallel-connected electromagnets, some of which can be disabled.
If a variable number of electromagnets is used, you must decrease time by time the value of parameter
C000 down to the sum of rated currents of operated magnets, in order to make sure that the current for
each electromagnet never exceeds both forward value during initial boost operation and reverse value
during final counter-energizing.
106/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
6.10.5 DCREG2 E LECTROMECHANICAL D IAGRAM F OR R EFERENCE

S WITCHING
The diagram in Figure 5 illustrates how commands and references are managed both for magnetization
and for demagnetisation. Using a DCREG2, the phase of counter-energizing, which is essential to suppress
residual magnetization, is no more available.
If relays are used instead of a PLC, relays controlled by DCREG2s digital outputs may be equipped with
AC or DC coils, provided that the maximum allowable power value is not exceeded. Because of weak
current values (milliAmperes), use low capacity relays to make sure that contacts properly close.
MDO 2 MDO 3 MDO 4

ENABLE
+24Vcc
START
MDI 4
+10V
REF
0V
2 1 5 24 26 40 34 29 31 33 35 37 39
RA
PDL
PV
RE
PD PE
RI
RE RI RA
RE
RE RA RI LMA
FIG. 5
LEGEND
LMA: Indicator light, magnet on PV: Potentiometer, energizing voltage

PD: Button, magnet deenergizing RA: Relay, converter enabling
PDL: Button, magnet partial deenergizing RE: Relay, storage of energizing/deenergizing commands
PE: Button, magnet energizing RI: Relay, current in the magnet on
107/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
6.10.6 DCREG2 S ETTING PARAMETER V ALUES D IFFERENT F ROM

D EFAULT V ALUES
P003 = 1 Advanced programming level
P011 = 1.15 x VMAINSnom Boost DC voltage forcing energizing current
P031 = 10 s Down ramp time of positive voltage reference
P034 = 60 s (example) Down ramp during partial demagnetisation
P059 = 0.01 %/s Ramp over current reference
P070 = 1 Proportional gain kp of voltage regulator
P071 = 0.1 s Integral time Ti of voltage regulator
P100 = 1.5 Proportional gain kp of current regulator
P101 = 10 ms Integral time Ti of current regulator (discontinuous operation)
P102 = 100 ms Integral time Ti of current regulator (continuous operation)
V
P122 = nom 100 Gain over REF for magnet rated voltage as a percentage of boost voltage
P 011
P176 = 5 Digital output MDO 2 set as Drive Running
P177 = 3 s (example) Digital output MDO 2 enabling delay for starting boost duration setting
P181 = 1 Digital output MDO 2 set up with normally closed logic
P185 = 5% Current threshold for digital output MDO 3 as a perc. of IDRIVEnom
P211 = +100% PresetSpd 1 for boost upon energizing
P230 = 30 Minimum delay angle
I
C000 = EM nom 100 Magnet rated current expressed as a percentage of the converter size
I DRIVE nom
C030 = VMAINSnom Three-phase, rated supply voltage for the converter
C070 = 4 Armature feedback
C150 = 1 Alarm A001 trip disabled (Field current failure)
C151 = 1 Alarm A004 cleared (Load loss)
C153 = 1 Alarm A006 trip disabled (Unstable mains frequency)
C154 = 1 Alarm A007 trip disabled (No supply phase)
C156 = 1 Alarm A010 trip disabled (Output over voltage)
C157 = 1 Alarms A016/17 trip disabled (Tolerance exceeded by mains voltage )
C170 = 1 Selection of inductive load
NOTES
1. Set P000 = 1 to alter the parameters above.
2. Save all changes made to the parameters above. The remaining parameters are expected to be
left at their default values (factory setting).
3. If an oscilloscope is used to monitor the response to a current reference step, temporarily change
the value of parameter C133 from 1: Preset Speed A (default value) to 6: Slave Enabled. If so, the
reference set on potentiometer PV (that must not be set at its max. value to avoid current limit) becomes a
current reference, for the time set in P177. The current waveform may be read on terminal 8 by setting par.
P150 to 9: ArmatureCurr
108/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
6.10.7 DCREG2 O PERATION D ESCRIPTION

If button PE is pressed, relay RE energizes, self-maintaining. When PE returns to its initial position, relay RA
energizes as well, self-maintaining. As a consequence, the series of two contacts on terminal 24 for
ENABLE closes and the converter starts delivering output voltage. Indicator light LMA comes on to indicate
that the magnet is on.
Closed contact of digital output MDO 2 keeps digital input MDI 4 active on terminal 34 for the time set in
P177; DC output voltage is set (with par. P011 and P211), which is equal to mains 3-phase voltage
increased by 15% (e.g. 460VDC with 400VAC).
Max. positive voltage which may be delivered by the converter with the value of 30 in par. P230 (AlfaMin)
is equal to V = VSUPPLY 1.36 cos Min (approx. +470VDC with 400VAC).
Then, the boost function activates, which considerably reduces the current rise time. Current will reach the
magnet rated value set in C000 within a given time. Even though the max. voltage reference is kept set for
a longer time (par. P177), voltage delivered to the magnet terminal will drop anyhow (converter in current
limit). If a variable number of electromagnets is used, you must decrease time by time the value of
parameter C000 down to the sum of rated currents of operated magnets.
As soon as current is other than zero, MDO 3 contact closes, thus energizing relay RI. If energizing button
PE is pressed at any moment, the duty cycle of the equipment is not affected, thanks to contact NO of RI
parallel-connected to contact NC of button PE and to contact NC of RI, which is series-connected to contact
NO of button PE.
When the time set in par. P177 is over, contact MDO 2 opens, and the reference becomes the magnet
rated voltage set in potentiometer PV, whose full-scale value is set in par. P122.
Switching from the max. voltage reference to the rated reference of the magnet, current drops, due to a
larger resistance of the electromagnet winding when this heats up. Otherwise, if boost is set for a too long
time (par.177), once the current rated value is reached, it is kept constant.
If button PDL is kept depressed for a given time, the voltage reference slowly drops following the ramp set
in parameter P034 and unloading the material in excess (partial demagnetisation). If button PDL is longer
kept pressed, the converter shuts off and output voltage drops to zero; to set again the desired voltage, just
release button PDL. Even if the voltage reference returns to its initial value without following any preset
ramp, current will rise slowly because the boost function is inactive.
If deenergizing button PD is pressed, relay RE deenergizes: this will cause opening the series of two
contacts on terminal 24 for ENABLE, setting stand-by command. As a consequence, input voltage reference
for terminal 5 is then switched to a current reference equal to zero.
Fall down to this value is performed with the maximum negative voltage that the converter can deliver; with
the default value of par. P231 (AlfaMax) this is equal to V = VSUPPLY 1.36 cos Max (approx. -470VDC
with 400VAC). The boost function enables, which considerably reduces current fall time.
When voltage and current cancel out, the converter is really disabled; contact MDO 4 opens and turns off
indicator light LMA.
As soon as current drops below the current threshold, relay RI deenergizes, thus allowing to send a new
energizing command.
When button PE is pressed again, self-maintenance is disabled for relay RA, and the operating cycle can
start again.
109/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
6.10.8 E NERGIZING /D EENERGIZING C URRENT PATTERNS
IE
( )
RE
L1
L2
L3
LE
( )
IE
IEM nom
Electromagnet energizing:
Rated voltage positive reference
Rated current positive reference, i.e. max. voltage positive reference ( a )
Electromagnet deenergizing and suppression of residual magnetization:

Voltage negative reference
Current negative reference, i.e. max. voltage negative reference ( b )
Zero current reference (Enable contact open) ( a )
( a ) Positive voltage limited to firing angle motor

( b ) Negative voltage limited to firing angle brake
110/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
6.10.9 O PERATION W ITH S AFE B ATTERIES

D1: Freewheeling diode for electromagnet
D2: Diode disabling battery charge from DCREG4
D3: Battery protecting diode
EM: Electromagnet TR
F1-2: Fuses for battery charger
K1: Contact NO of freewheeling contactor
K2: Contact NC of battery plug-in contactor
L: Line inductance for battery charger BATTERY CHARGER
TR: Isolation transformer for battery charger supply
(this is required if DCREG4 is not isolated
from the mains)
L
K2 F1
( )
F2
K1
D3
DCREG4 EM
D1
BATTERIES
( )
D2
OPERATION SEQUENCE
For safety reasons, coil in contactor K2 voltage is derived from the mains, with normally closed power
poles.
When supply mains is on, poles are open.
When voltage is removed, poles of contactors K1 and K2 must instantly close. Battery supply is then
delivered to the electromagnet.
When the converter comes on again, external contacts and the DCREG4 reference must be capable of
starting it up immediately (electromagnet energizing with a properly large voltage reference). If no alarm
trips, an external timer must be enabled. When its counting is over and the DCREG4 is adjusting a voltage
value higher than the voltage supplied to the batteries (see section below), freewheeling diode and reserve
batteries may be disconnected. Poles of contactors K1 and K2 open again.
If voltage is removed while deenergizing (i.e. after pressing button PD), batteries shall not activate, because
if counter-energizing has already started, DCREG4 output should be short-circuited from diode D1.
NOTE 1. Diodes D13 are to be dimensioned for a current value equal to the electromagnet
current and for inverse voltage equal to 1600V, provided that DCREG4 3-phase supply does not exceed
440V.
NOTE 2. Current used to charge safe batteries can be equal to 10% of their capacity in Ah, for a
time period of approx. 10h.
111/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
6.10.10 A LARMS
If a failure is detected, an alarm trips and stops the converter. Default setting of digital output MDO 1 is
0:Drive OK.
Two conditions may occur:

1) After 0.5 s, the alarm tripped is stored to E2PROM.
2) The alarm tripped is NOT stored to E2PROM (e.g. failure of one or more supply phases).
If the alarm tripped is stored to E2PROM and the cause responsible for the alarm has disappeared, send a
reset command to terminal 28 (MDI 1), which is factory-set to 0:Reset.
If the alarm is not stored to E2PROM (failure of one or more supply phases), when mains supply comes on
again and if the ENABLE contact is still closed, the converter is self-reset, but will be able to restart only
after 10s from the instant when power is restored. This is a safety delay set in par. C101 (PwrOn Time)
(factory-setting: 10s).
The safety delay is enabled only for the first start-up after a power failure.
If safe batteries are installed, which activate in case of power failure, the time set in the external timer must
be longer than 10s.
Safe battery voltage can be higher (at least in a first stage) than the magnet rated voltage; also, voltage set
in the potentiometer can be accidentally too low. Make sure that the voltage regulated by the converter is
higher than the battery voltage when batteries are on and the converter is operating again; if not, the
converter will tend to discharge safe batteries. To do so, contact between terminals 29 and 31 (MDO 2)
must be kept closed for the required time period.
112/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
7 OPERATION PARAMETERS
7.1 MEASURE PARAMETERS

The measure parameters are the display parameters marked with an M followed by the parameter
number.
The following symbols have been used to describe the above mentioned parameters and any other
parameters afterwards stated.
Keys to the symbols used:
P : Parameter number
R : Range of the allowable values
D : Factory setting
F : Function
7.1.1 M000: R EFERENCE A PPLIED TO THE R AMPS

M000 Vreference P M000 - Vref
Vref ***** % R -150. +150. %
F If the drive is on (RUN LED on), this parameter corresponds - as a value per cent
of the max. reference corresponding to 10V - to the Ref n reference applied to
the ramps. Otherwise (if the ENABLE digital input is inactive), this parameter
indicates the reference that is likely to be applied to the ramps when the drive is
running - once this input is enabled and without changing the current state of the
START, PRESET SPEED and JOG inputs (according to the logic stated in the table
contained in the BLOCK DIAGRAM). The reference obtained is either a speed /
voltage reference or a current reference, should the 6:Slave function (see
parameters C130 ... C135) be enabled through a digital input.
The value per cent displayed in this parameter - either as a speed / voltage
reference or a current reference -keeps track of the Reverse function applied to
the reference selected to be displayed in this parameter, i.e. Main Ref, Preset Ref
or Jog Ref.
The value contained in this parameter is displayed also in the first line on the
Keypad page, while the other measure parameters selected through par. P005
(FirstParm) and P006 (MeasureSel) may be contained in the lower line.
7.1.2 M001: S PEED / V OLTAGE F EEDBACK

M001 SpeedFdbk P M001 - nFdbk
nFdbk ***** % R -100. 100. %
F This parameter indicates, as a percentage of the max. feedback corresponding
to 10V, the value of the overall n setpoint (resulting from the algebraic sum of all
applied references) with armature compensation (P086, P088) correction (if any)
and offset (P087) correction (if any).
In case of a tacho feedback or an encoder feedback, 100% of such value
corresponds to the max. speed set through parameter P010.
In case of an armature feedback, 100% of such value corresponds to the max.
voltage set through parameter P011.
113/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
7.1.3 M002: O VERALL S PEED /V OLTAGE R EFERENCE

From SW Vers. D3.09
M002 nSetPoint P M002 - nSetP

nSetP ***** % R -100. 100. %
F This parameter indicates, as a percentage of the max. reference corresponding
to 10V, the overall speed / voltage reference n setpoint which is applied time
after time. This reference is compared - when summed up to the armature
compensation (P086, P088) correction (if any) and the offset (P087) correction -
to the feedback value displayed for par. M001 (nFdbk).
Up to SW Vers D3.07
M002 SpeedError P M002 - Verr

Verr ***** % R -200. 200. %
F This parameter indicates, as a percentage of the max. error corresponding to
10V, the difference between the speed / voltage overall reference n setpoint -
with armature compensation (P086, P088) correction (if any) and offset (P087)
correction (if any)- and the feedback quantity (tacho, encoder or armature
voltage).
For instance, if only the REF main reference applied to the ramps is used (with no
additional references), then M002 = M000 - M001 at steady state.
7.1.4 M003: A RMATURE C URRENT R EFERENCE

M003 ArmCurrRef P M003 - Iref
Iref ***** % R -150. ... 150. %
to the drive rated current, the current loop input (corresponding to the speed /
voltage loop output) eventually limited by one or more relevant parameters (see
parameter C000 and parameter set P050 ... P062, in case of internal limit).
For instance, for a DCREG.100, 100% of M003 will correspond to 100A.
7.1.5 M004: A RMATURE C URRENT

M004 ArmCurrent P M004 - Iarm
Iarm ***** Amps R -5250 ... 5250 Amps
F This parameter indicates, in Amperes, the mean value of the armature current
feedback, which is obtained through the current transformers.
7.1.6 M005: T HYRISTOR F IRING D ELAY A NGLE

M005 FiringDelay P M005 - Alfa
Alfa **** R P230 ... P231
F This parameter indicates, in electrical degrees, the delay angle of the thyristor
firing pulses.
Such angle results from the intersections of the three-phase line voltages.
114/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
7.1.7 M006: A RMATURE V OLTAGE

M006 ArmatureV P M006 - Varm
Varm ***** V R -1000 ... 1000 V
F This parameter indicates, in Volts, the voltage across the motor armature circuit.
Such voltage is directly measured at the drive output.
7.1.8 M007: B ACK - ELECTROMOTIVE FORCE
M007 BackEMF P M007 - BEMF

BEMF ***** V R -1000 ... 1000 V
F This parameter indicates, in Volts, the back-electromotive force generated by the
motor.
Such voltage is internally calculated using the motor electric ratings.
If the current loop operation has been programmed by setting parameter C051
to 0:PI operating, this parameter will not be calculated.
7.1.9 M008: M AINS F REQUENCY

M008 MainsFreq P M008 - Frequency
MFreq **** Hz R 40.0 ... 70.0 Hz (normally displayed range)
F This parameter indicates, in Hertz, the power supply mains frequency measured
on the input bars.
7.1.10 M009: M AINS V OLTAGE

M009 MainsV P M009 - Vmains
Vmains **** V R 0 ... 1000 V
F This parameter indicates, in Volts, the mains voltage applied to the drive power
section.
7.1.11 M010: AUXILIARY ANALOG INPUT 1 TO TERMINALS 11 AND 13

M010 AnalogIn1 P M010 - AnIn1
AnIn1 ***** % R -100. ... 100. %
to 10V, the value of the reference resulting from IN 1 reference application
between terminals 11 and 13. The reference obtained may be configured
through parameter C120.
The value per cent displayed in this parameter takes account of the Gain, Bias,
Polarityblocks (see parameters P128, P127 and P126 respectively) and of the
Reverse function which are applied in the above-mentioned order.
The value per cent displayed in this parameter also displays the reference issued
from a current external signal (milliAmperes), provided that jumper JP8 on
terminal board ES801 (JP408 in ES906) is set on position 2-3: if an analog input
is to be used as a 0(4) ... 20mA signal, the value to be set on the parameters
relating to Gain and Bias operators is shown in the MILLIAMPERE INPUT /
OUTPUT SIGNALS chapter.
115/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
7.1.12 M011: A UXILIARY A NALOG I NPUT 2 ON T ERMINAL 17

AnIn2 ***** % R -100. ... 100. %
between terminal 17 and 0V. The reference obtained may be configured through
parameter C121.
The value per cent displayed in this parameter takes account of the Gain, Bias
and Polarity blocks (see parameters P131, P130 and P129 respectively) and of
the Reverse function - only if an input is configured as a speed additional
reference - applied in the above-mentioned order.
7.1.13 M012: A UXILIARY A NALOG I NPUT 3 ON T ERMINAL

AnIn3 ***** % R -100. ... 100. %
between terminal 19 and 0V. The reference obtained may be configured through
parameter C122.
The value per cent displayed in this parameter takes account of the Gain, Bias
and Polarity blocks (see parameters P134, P133 and P132 respectively) and of
the Reverse function - only if an input is configured as a speed additional
reference - applied in the above-mentioned order.
7.1.14 M013: U P /D OWN I NTERNAL R EFERENCE

M013 UpDownref P M013 - UpDnRef
UpDnRef ***** % R -100 ... 100. %
to 10V, the value of the reference assigned to the Up/Down internal variable.
116/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
7.1.15 M014: M AIN A NALOG I NPUT TO T ERMINALS 5 AND 7

M014 TermRef P M014 - TermRef
TermRef ***** % R -100 ... 100. %
to 10V, the value of the reference resulting from the application of the REF main
analog input between terminals 5 and 7. The reference obtained is either a
speed / voltage reference or a current reference if the 6:Slave function is entered
through a digital input (see par. C130 C135).
The value per cent displayed in this parameter, either as a speed / voltage
reference or a current reference, considers the Gain, Bias and Polarity blocks
(see par. P122, P121 and P120, or par. P125, P124 and P123 respectively for
the two types of references) applied in the above-mentioned order.
For example, if a motor rotates at 2000 RPM with a 10V reference and if P122 =
100%, then with a 10V reference and if P122 = 25% the motor will rotate at 500
RPM (the display will show M014 = 25% and M001 = 25%); otherwise, with a
2.5V reference and if P122 = 200%, the motor will rotate at 1000 RPM (the
display will show M014 = 50% and M001 = 50%).
The value per cent displayed in this parameter also indicates the reference
obtained from a current external signal (milliAmpere) if jumper JP7 in ES801
(JP407 in ES906) is set in pos. 2-3: if the user intends to use an analog input as
a 0(4) 20mA signal, the value to program in the parameters relating to the
Gain and Bias operators is stated in the INPUT / OUTPUT SIGNAL IN
MILLIAMPERE chapter.
7.1.16 M015: S ERIAL C ONNECTION R EFERENCE

M015 SLinkRef P M015 - SLRef
SLRef ***** % R -100. ... 100. %
F This parameter indicates, as a percentage of the max. value corresponding to
10V, the value of the reference applied through serial connection.
7.1.17 M016: F IELD B US R EFERENCE

M016 FBusRef P M016 - FBRef
FBRef ***** % R -100. ... 100. %
F This parameter indicates, as a percentage of the max. value corresponding to
10V, the value of the reference applied through the field bus.
7.1.18 M017: F IELD C URRENT R EFERENCE

M017 FldCurrRef P M017 - RefFld
RefFld **** % R 0.00 ... 100. %
F It indicates, as a percentage of the max. reference corresponding to the max.
field current that may be generated by the drive, the current loop input
(corresponding to the voltage loop output) of the internal field regulator. The
standard values of the max. field current generated by the drive are equal to 5A
for DCREG.100max, 15A for DCREG.150min Size 1, and 35A for DCREG Size
2(A) and MODULAR.S.
For instance, for a DCREG.350, 100% of M017 will correspond to 15A.
117/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
7.1.19 M018: F IELD C URRENT

M018 FldCurrent P M018 - Ifld
Ifld **** Amps R 0.00 ... 40.0 Amps
F This parameter indicates, in Amperes, the field current feedback value obtained
through the zero gauss current transformer.
7.1.20 M019: A NALOG O UTPUT 1 ON T ERMINAL 8

M019 AnalogOut1 P M019 - AnOut1
AnOut1 ***** V R -10.0 ... +10.0 V
F This parameter indicates, in Volts, the value of the analog output available on
terminal 8.
The output at issue may be configured through parameter P150.
The value per cent displayed in this parameter considers the Gain, Bias and
Polarity operators set through parameters P152, P151 and P157 respectively.
7.1.21 M020: A NALOG O UTPUT 2 ON T ERMINAL 10

M020 AnalogOut2 P M020 - AnOut2
AnOut2 ***** V R -10.0 ... +10.0 V
F This parameter indicates, in Volts, the value of the analog output available on
terminal 10.
The output at issue may be configured through parameter P153.
The value per cent displayed in this parameter considers the Gain, Bias and
Polarity operators set through parameters P155, P154 and P158 respectively.
7.1.22 M021: F INAL I NTERNAL S TATE OF D IGITAL I NPUTS

M021 E S 1 2 3 4 5 6 P M021 - Digln
DigIn R ... (the figure shows a display example for each input)
F This parameter displays the final internal state of the ENABLE and START digital
inputs and of MDIx digital inputs that can be configured through par. C130
C135. The final internal state results from the combination of commands sent
from the sources enabled with par. C110 C112 (SeqSelx), selected through
terminals, serial connection or field bus. Particularly, for the ENABLE input, the
signals AND is considered (this input is active only if all inputs are active and if
the ENABLE contact is closed on terminal 24). For the remaining seven inputs,
the signals OR is considered (at least one of the inputs must be active).
A small black square indicates that the digital input is active.
The ID-digital input matching is the following:

E ENABLE input logical state.
S START input logical state.
1 MDI1 input logical state.
118/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
7.1.23 M022: D IGITAL O UTPUT S TATE

M022 12345 P M022 - MDO
MDO R ... (the figure shows a display example for each output)
F This parameter displays the state of the available MDOx digital outputs, that may
be configured through parameters P170 ... P199. A small black square indicates
that the digital output is closed.
The output terminal states are the following:

1 state of the contact corresponding to output MDO1 (terminals 25-27).
7.1.24 M023: F IELD R EGULATOR I NTERNAL D IGITAL I NPUT S TATE

M023 RUN > 55 Hz P M023 - FldReg
FldReg R ... (the figure shows a display example for each output)
F Displays the state of the two inner digital inputs of the field regulator. A black
square indicates that the digital input is active, i.e. the relating terminal on the
field regulator is connected to 0V.
7.1.25 M024: O UTPUT P OWER

M024 OutputPower P M024 POut
Pout **** kW R 0 5250 kW
F This parameter indicates, in kW, the power supplied to the load, as a division by
1000 of the output voltage product (par. M006) for the output current (par.
M004).
7.1.26 M025: M OTOR T ORQUE

M025 MotorTorque P M025 Torque
Torque **** % R -180. 180. %
F It displays, as a percentage of the motor nominal torque, the motor torque as a
product per cent of the armature current by the field current. 100% of this
parameter is obtained with the motor armature nominal current (set by par.
C000) and the motor field nominal current (set by par. C010).
7.1.27 M026: E NCODER F REQUENCY

M026 EncoderFreq P M026 EFreq
EFreq ****** kHz R -102.4 102.4 kHz
F This parameter displays, in kHz, the frequency of the encoder used as a speed
feedback.
119/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
7.1.28 M027: D RIVE L IFE

M027 Drivelife P M027 Drivelife
*****h **m R 0 ... 235926000 s (approx. 7 years and a half), size ..h ..m
F This parameter indicates the drive overall operation time starting from its first
power-on. This value is stored each time the power section is shut off.
7.1.29 M028: P HASE S EQ

M028 PhaseSeq P M028 PhaseSeq
* * * R RST TSR
F Indicates which is the phase sequence supplying the drive section power with
reference to bars L1-L2-L3 respectively.
7.1.30 M029: D IGITAL I NPUT S TATE FROM T ERMINAL B OARD

M029 E S 1 2 3 4 5 6 P M029 - TrmDgln
TrmDgIn R ... (the figure shows a display example for each input)
F This parameter displays the state (in the terminal board) of the ENABLE and
START digital inputs and of the MDIx digital inputs configured through par. C130
C135. A small black square indicates that the digital input is active, i.e. that
the relevant terminal is connected to + 24V.
The ID-input terminal matching is the following:

E ENABLE input logical state (terminal 24).
S START input logical state (terminal 26).
1 MDI1 input logical state (terminal 28).
120/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
7.1.31 M030: D IGITAL I NPUT S TATE FROM S ERIAL C ONNECTION

M030 E S 1 2 3 4 5 6 P M030 - SLDgln
SLDgIn R ... (the figure shows a display example for each input)
F This parameter displays the state (from serial connection) of the ENABLE and
START digital inputs, and of the MDIx digital inputs that can be configured
through parameter C130 C135. A small black square indicates that the
digital input is active.

7.1.32 M031: D IGITAL I NPUT S TATE FROM B US F IELD

M031 E S 1 2 3 4 5 6 P M031 - FBDgln
FBDgIn R ... (the figure shows a display example for each input)
F This parameter displays the state (from bus field) of the ENABLE and START digital
inputs, and of the MDIx digital inputs that can be configured through parameters
C130 C135. A small black square indicates that the digital input is active.

121/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
7.2 PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS

The value of the programming parameters may be fixed by the user even during the drive operation. These
parameters are marked with a P followed by the parameter number.
7.2.1 P000: P ROGRAMMING C ODE

P000 Key P P000 - Key
*** R 0 ... 2
D 0
F Programming access code.
0:Program Disable. Only P000 may be changed.
1:Program Enable. All parameters may be changed (for Cxxx parameters, the
ENABLE digital input is not to be active).
2:Modified Parms. As for parameters Pxxx and Cxxx, only the parameters whose
actual value is different from the default value are displayed, along with all the
Mxxx measure parameters. The programming mode will also be activated,
according to the results obtained by setting parameter P000 = 1. Even though
par. P003 (ProgLevel) is set at 0:Basic, all the Pxxx and Cxxx parameters whose
current value is different from the default value are displayed.
For this parameter, no values other than 0:ProgramDisable may be stored on

WARNING
EEPROM.
7.2.2 P001: A UTOTUNING C OMMAND

P001 AutoTune P P001 AutoTune
*** R 03
D 0
F Access code for autotuning.
0:Disabled. No autotune is performed.
1:Current. The current loop autotuning is performed by choosing a predictive
control through par. C051 (CurrLoopSel) to 1:Predictive=>J1, it computes the
value for par. P103, P104. The parameter relating to the armature feedback
reading is optimised so that par. M006 (Varm) displays 0V when the drive is on.
Before performing current autotune, set jumper J1 from position 1 to position 0.
Jumper J1 is located on board ES729/1 (installed inside the equipment on control
board ES728/2).
2:Speed. The speed loop autotuning is performed and par. P070, P071 or P076,
P077 are computed if the digital input is closed by configuring one of par. C130
C135 as 8:SecondParmSet.
3:RxI. The armature resistive drop measure is performed. The result is stored in
par. P088 (RxI).The parameter value relating to the armature feedback reading is
optimised, so that par. M006 (Varm) displays 0V when the drive is off.
WARNING For this parameter, no values other than 0:Disabled may be stored on EEPROM.
122/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
7.2.3 P002: PARAMETER C OPY C OMMAND

P002 ParmsCopy P P002 ParmsCopy
*** R 03
D 0
F Access code for the parameter copy.
0:Disabled. No parameter copy command is sent.
1:DefaultRestore. Restoration of the users parameter default values.
2:WorkAreaBackup. Backup of the current parameters.
3:Backup Restore. Restoration of the backup parameters.
See also the PARAMETER COPY chapter.
WARNING For this parameter, no values other than 0:Disabled may be stored on EEPROM.
7.2.4 P003: P ROGRAMMING L EVEL

P003 ProgLevel P P003 ProgLevel
*** R 01
D 0
F 0:Basic.
1:Advanced.
Sets the programming level required, chosen between a fast starting base level
with the basic functions and an advanced level for skilled users who want to
optimise the equipment performance.
If this parameter is programmed at 0:Basic, only the following parameters may be
accessed:
M000 (Vref). Reference applied to the ramps.

M031 (FBDgIn). Digital input state from field bus.
P000 (Key)
P003 (ProgLevel)
P010 (nFdbkMax)
P011 (VarmMax)
P030 (RampUpPos)
P031 (RampDnPos)
P032 (RampUpNeg)
P033 (RampDnNeg)
P034 (RampStopPos)
P035 (RampStopNeg)
P038 (InitialRndg)
P039 (FinalRndg)
P060 (OverLimA)
P061 (OverLimB)
P086 (ArmatureCmp)
P087 (VerrOffset)
C000 (Inom)
C010 (IfldNom)
C030 (VmainsNom)
C051 (CurrLoopSel)
C070 (nFdbkSelect)
C072 (EncoderPls)
C074 (Tach Volts)
If this parameter is set at 1:Advanced, all other parameters may be accessed.
123/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
7.2.5 P004: P AGE D ISPLAYED AT P OWER ON
P004 FirstPage P P004 FirstPage

*** R 01
D 0
F This parameter determines the page displayed when the control section is turned
on.
0:Status. The Status page is displayed at power on.
1:KeyPad. The KeyPad page is displayed at power on.
7.2.6 P005: MEASURE PARAMETER DISPLAY ON THE KEYPAD PAGE

P005 FirstParm P P005 FirstParm
*** R M000 M031 + Select (P006)
D Select (P006)
F If this parameter is assigned a value among the available Mxxx parameters,
when pressing the PROG key the display will cycle through all measure
parameters in the bottom line on the Keypad page starting from the selected
one.
If this parameter is kept at its default value, the parameters displayed in the
bottom line on the Keypad page are the parameters defined in par. P006
(MeasureSel) only.
7.2.7 P006: MEASURE PARAMETER SELECTION ON THE KEYPAD PAGE

P006 MeasureSel P P006 MeasureSel
*** R * * * * * * * * ... 3131313131313131
D ********
F If par. P005 (FirstParm) is assigned its default value, this parameter defines all
measure parameters (max. 8 par.) that have to be cyclically displayed in the
bottom line on the Keypad page (max. 8 parameters) when pressing the PROG
key.
7.2.8 P010: M AX . S PEED

P010 nFdbkMax P P010 - nFdbkMax
**** RPM R 300 ... 6000 RPM
D 2500 RPM
F It sets, in rpm, the max. speed the motor achieves in case of a tacho or encoder
feedback when the speed reference is equal to 100%.
In both cases, the constant of the transducer used is to be set. Use parameter
C072 if the transducer is represented by the encoder; use parameter C074 if the
transducer is represented by the tacho.
In encoder feedback mode, the values set in par. C072 and in par. P010 have to
ensure that product C072P010 does not exceed 102.400kHz (e.g. 1024
pulse/rev per 6000 RPM max), whereas in tacho feedback mode the values set in
WARNING
par. C074 and par. P010 have to ensure that product C074P010 does not
exceed 25V if C070 = 0, 80V if C070 = 1, 250V if C070 = 2. Otherwise,
this will cause drive speed control failure.
124/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
7.2.9 P011: M AX . A RMATURE V OLTAGE

P011 VarmMax P P011 - VarmMax
*** V R 50 ... 2000V
D DCREG4: 400 V
DCREG2: 460 V
F It sets, in Volts, the max. armature voltage the motor achieves in case of an
armature feedback, when the voltage reference is equal to 100%.
A software lock exists avoiding to decrease par. P011 value under the value set
WARNING
in par. P088 (RxI).
For this parameter, never save a parameter lower than the one saved in
WARNING
EEPROM for P088 in order to avoid the drive malfunction.
7.2.10 P012: S PEED / V OLTAGE R EFERENCE P OLARITY

P012 SpdDmndPo1 P P012 - SpdDmndPol
*** R 0 ... 2
D 0
F This parameter sets the allowable polarity both for the Ref n reference applied to
the ramps and for the n setpoint global speed / voltage reference resulting from
the algebraic sum of all the applied references.
0:Bipolar. Bipolar reference.
1:Positive only. Positive reference only.
2:Negative only. Negative reference only.
If you program a unipolar global reference, the possible reference of the
opposite polarity will be shut and considered as equal to zero.
This parameter has no effect either on the jog internal references, that may have
a dual polarity with no min. values, or on the possible offset on the speed error
set through parameter P087.
In order to enter a positive (P014) or negative (P016) min. speed / voltage
reference, you need to first program P012 = 1:Positive only or P012 =
2:Negative only respectively.
In order to change P012 value, both parameters P014 and P016 are to be equal
to zero.
If a certain min. reference other than zero is saved in EEPROM (parameter P014
WARNING or P016), in P012 do not save any value that does not match the polarity of the
said min. reference, as this will cause the drive malfunction.
125/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
7.2.11 P013: M AX . P OSITIVE S PEED / V OLTAGE R EFERENCE

P013 nMaxPos P P013 - nMaxPos
*** % R 0 ... 100 %
D 100 %
F This parameter sets, as a percentage of the max. reference corresponding to
10V, the max. allowable value both for the Ref n reference applied to the ramps
and for the n setpoint global positive speed / voltage reference resulting from the
algebraic sum of all the applied references.
This parameter may be used to limit the speed set in the running direction at
issue.
In this parameter, do not save any lower value than the one saved in EEPROM
WARNING
for P014, as this will cause the drive malfunction.
7.2.12 P014: M IN . P OSITIVE S PEED / V OLTAGE R EFERENCE

P014 nMinPos P P014 - nMinPos
*** % R 0 ... 100 %
D 0%
10V, the min. allowable value both for the Ref n reference applied to the ramps
and for the n setpoint global positive speed / voltage reference, even if no
reference is applied or if negative references are applied. In this parameter, in
order to enter a min. reference you need to program P012 = 1:Positive only
first. Anyway, disabling of minimum speed can be achieved by closing the digital
input set to the 9:MinSpdDisabled function (see parameter set C130 ... C135).
In this parameter, do not save any value exceeding the one saved in EEPROM
WARNING
If a value of P012 1 is saved in EEPROM, do not save any value other than
WARNING
zero for this parameter, as this will cause the drive malfunction.
7.2.13 P015: M AX . N EGATIVE S PEED / V OLTAGE R EFERENCE

P015 nMaxNeg P P015 - nMaxNeg
**** % R -100 ... 0 %
D -100 %
10V, the max. allowable absolute value both for the Ref n reference applied to
the ramps and for the n setpoint global negative speed / voltage reference
resulting from the algebraic sum of all the applied references.
In this parameter, do not save - as an absolute value - any value exceeding the
one saved in EEPROM for P016, as this will cause the drive malfunction.
WARNING
This parameter may be used to limit the speed set in the running direction at
issue.
126/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
7.2.14 P016: M IN . N EGATIVE S PEED / V OLTAGE R EFERENCE

P016 nMinNeg P P016 - nMinNeg
**** % R -100 ... 0 %
D 0%
F It sets, as a percentage of the max. reference corresponding to 10V, the min.
absolute value allowed both for the Ref n reference applied to the ramps and for
the n setpoint negative global speed / voltage reference, even if no reference is
applied or if positive references are applied. In this parameter, in order to enter
a min. reference you need to program P012 = 2:Negative only first. Anyway,
disabling of minimum speed can be achieved by closing the digital input set
to the 9:MinSpdDisabled function (see parameter set C130 ... C135).
In this parameter, do not save - as an absolute value - any value exceeding the
WARNING
one saved in EEPROM for P015, as this will cause the drive malfunction.
If a value of P012 2 is saved in EEPROM, do not save any value other than
WARNING
zero for this parameter, as this will cause the drive malfunction.
7.2.15 P030: R ISE R AMP OF THE P OSITIVE R EFERENCE

P030 RampUpPos P P030 - RampUpPos
***** sec R 0.000 ... 300.0 s
D 0.000 s
F Rise ramp time, expressed in seconds, from 0% to 100% of the positive speed /
voltage reference applied to the Main Ref or the Preset Ref (preset run reference),
possibly limited at the minimum and/or maximum value. See also figure shown
in the RAMPS OVER REFERENCE chapter.
For both DCREG4 and DCREG2, the real speed ramp corresponds to the ramp
set in this parameter as long as the drive is not in current limit mode.
This parameter programming cannot be changed if a digital input configured for

NOTE
the 7:Ramps Disabled function is closed.
7.2.16 P031: F ALL R AMP OF THE P OSITIVE R EFERENCE

P031 RampDnPos P P031 - RampDnPos
***** sec R 0.000 ... 300.0 s
D 0.000 s
F Fall ramp time, expressed in seconds, from 100% to 0% of the positive speed /
For DCREG4, the real speed ramp corresponds to the ramp set in this parameter as
long as the drive is not in current limit mode, whereas for DCREG2, the real
speed ramp corresponds to the ramp set as soon as it exceeds the time required
for the coast to stop stage.

NOTE
127/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
7.2.17 P032: R ISE R AMP OF THE N EGATIVE R EFERENCE

P032 RampUpNeg P P032 - RampUpNeg
***** sec R 0.000 ... 300.0 s
D 0.000 s
F Rise ramp time, expressed in seconds, from 0% to 100% of the negative speed /
As for the real speed ramp, see relevant note stated in parameter P030.

NOTE
7.2.18 P033: F ALL R AMP OF THE N EGATIVE R EFERENCE

P033 RampDnNeg P P033 - RampDnNeg
***** sec R 0.000 ... 300.0 s
D 0.000 s
F Fall ramp time, expressed in seconds, from 100% to 0% of the negative speed /

NOTE
7.2.19 P034: S TOP R AMP OF THE P OSITIVE R EFERENCE

P034 RampStopPos P P034 - RampStopPos
***** sec R 0.000 ... 300.0 s
D 0.000 s
F Fall ramp time, expressed in seconds, from 100% to 0% of the positive speed /
possibly limited at the minimum and/or maximum value, due to the disabling of
the START digital input. See also the figure shown in the RAMPS OVER
REFERENCE chapter.
In order to exactly respect the time set for the stop ramp, the time set in par.
P031 is to be equal to at least 10% of the time set in P034.
Such parameter sets a positive reference fall ramp to be enabled - through the
disabling of the START input - instead of the main ramp defined in parameter
P031.

NOTE
128/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
7.2.20 P035: S TOP R AMP OF THE N EGATIVE R EFERENCE

P035 RampStopNeg P P035 - RampStopNeg
***** sec R 0.000 ... 300.0 s
D 0.000 s
F Fall ramp time, expressed in seconds, from 100% to 0% of the negative speed /
possibly limited at the minimum and/or maximum value, due to the disabling of
the START digital input. See also figure shown in the RAMPS OVER REFERENCE
chapter.
In order to exactly respect the time set for the stop ramp, the time set in par.
P033 is to be equal to at least 10% of the time set in P035.
Such parameter sets a negative reference fall ramp to be enabled - through the
disabling of the START input - instead of the main ramp defined in parameter
P033.
This parameter setting cannot be changed if a digital input configured for the
NOTE
7:Ramps Disabled function is closed.
7.2.21 P036: R ISE R AMP OF THE J OG R EFERENCE

P036 RampUpJog P P036 - RampUpJog
***** sec R 0.000 ... 300.0 s
D 0.000 s
F Rise ramp time, expressed in seconds, from 0% to 100% of the speed / voltage
reference selected among the three items programmed on parameters P222 ...
P224 and enabled if max. two preset digital inputs close, should some parameter
among C130...C135 be set to 12:JogA and 13:JogB.
The value programmed in this parameter is used for P221 = 2:Separate ramps.
As for the real speed ramp, see relevant note in parameter P030.
7.2.22 P037: F ALL R AMP OF THE J OG R EFERENCE

P037 RampDnJog P P037 - RampDnJog
***** sec R 0.000 ... 300.0 s
D 0.000 s
F Fall ramp time, expressed in seconds, from 100% to 0% of the speed / voltage
reference selected among the three items set on parameters P222 ... P224,
which is enabled if the value set in this parameter decreases or if max. two preset
digital inputs open, should some parameter among C130 ... C135 be set to
12:JogA and 13:JogB.
The value programmed in this parameter is used for P221 = 2:Separate ramps.
As for the real speed ramp, see relevant note in parameter P031.
129/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
7.2.23 P038: R AMP I NITIAL R OUNDING

P038 InitialRndg P P038 - InitialRndg
*** sec R 0.0 ... 10. s
D 0.0 s
F This parameter sets, in seconds, the initial rounding of the ramps up and ramps
down defined through parameters P030 ... P033. See also figure shown in the
RAMPS OVER REFERENCE chapter.

NOTE
7.2.24 P039: R AMP F INAL R OUNDING

P039 FinalRndg P P039 - FinalRndg
*** sec R 0.0 ... 10. s
D 0.0 s
F This parameter sets, in seconds, the final rounding of the ramps up and ramps
down defined through parameters P030 ... P033. See also figure shown in the
RAMPS OVER REFERENCE chapter.
This parameter programming cannot be changed in case a digital input

NOTE
configured for the 7:Ramps Disabled function is closed.
7.2.25 P040: R AMP OF THE U P /D OWN I NTERNAL R EFERENCE

P040 UpDnRefRamp P P040 - UpDnRefRamp
***** sec R .1000 ... 100. s
D 10.00 s
F This parameter sets the time variation (in seconds), both for the rise ramp and
the fall ramp, from 0% to 100% of the internal UpDownRef when the increase /
decrease digital inputs are enabled. See also the MOTOR POTENTIOMETER
chapter.
7.2.26 P050: B RIDGE A F IRST C URRENT L IMIT

P050 Ilim1A P P050 - Ilim1A
*** % R 0 ... 300 %
D 100 %
F This parameter sets the first current limit value relating to bridge A. Such value
indicates the percentage of C000 motor rated current, eventually with the
trimmer hardware limit (Imax[T2]).
That limit is used if the speed is lower than the value set in P054. When M001
(nFdbk) speed is higher than the value set in P054, P052 limit is used. See also
figure shown in the CURRENT LIMIT chapter.
The product of P050C000IMAX[T2] is not to exceed 100%, that corresponds

WARNING
to the drive rated current (e.g. 100A for a DCREG.100).
130/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
7.2.27 P051: B RIDGE B F IRST C URRENT L IMIT

P051 Ilim1B P P051 - Ilim1B (used in DCREG4 only)
*** % R 0 ... 300 %
D DCREG4: 100%
DCREG2: 0% (not used)
F This parameter sets the first current limit value relating to bridge B. It is available
in DCREG4 only. Such value indicates the percentage of C000 motor rated
current, eventually with the trimmer hardware limit (IMAX[T2]).
That limit is used if the speed is lower than the value set in P054. When M001
(nFdbk) speed is higher than the value set in P054, P052 limit is used. See also
The product of P050C000IMAX[T2] is not to exceed 100%, that corresponds

WARNING
to the drive rated current (e.g. 100A for a DCREG.100).
7.2.28 P052: B RIDGE A S ECOND C URRENT L IMIT

P052 Ilim2A P P052 - Ilim2A
*** % R 0 ... 300 %
D 100 %
F This parameter sets the second current limit value relating to bridge A. Such
value indicates the percentage of C000 motor rated current, eventually with the
trimmer hardware limit (IMAX[T2]).
That limit is used if the speed is higher than the value set in P054. When M001
(nFdbk) speed is lower than the value set in P054, P050 limit is used. See also
The product of P052C000IMAX[T2] is not to exceed 100%, that corresponds to

WARNING
the drive rated current (e.g. 100A for a DCREG.100).
7.2.29 P053: B RIDGE B S ECOND C URRENT L IMIT

P053 Ilim2B P P053 - Ilim2B (used in DCREG4 only)
*** % R 0 ... 300 %
D DCREG4: 100%
DCREG2: 0% (not used)
F This parameter sets the second current limit value relating to bridge B. It is
available in DCREG4 only. Such value indicates the percentage of C000 motor
rated current, eventually with the trimmer hardware limit (IMAX[T2]).
That limit is used if the speed is higher than the value set in P054. When M001
(nFdbk) speed is lower than the value set in P054, P051 limit is used. See also
The product of P053C000IMAX[T2] is not to exceed 100%, that corresponds to

WARNING
the drive rated current (e.g. 100A for a DCREG4.100).
131/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
7.2.30 P054: F IRST TO S ECOND C URRENT L IMIT S PEED

P054 Speed 1 2 P P054 - Speed 1 2
*** % R 0 ... 100 %
D 100 %
F This is the speed, expressed as the value per cent set in P010 (nFdbkMax), above
which switching from the first to the second current limit value (from P050 to
P052 or from P051 to P053, depending on the active bridge) occurs. See also
This parameter is aimed at obtaining a two-value characteristic for the current
limit.
7.2.31 P055: H YPERBOLIC PATTERN E ND C URRENT L IMIT

P055 IlimHyper P P055 - IlimHyper
*** % R 0 ... 300 %
D 100 %
F This parameter sets the current limit value at the end of the hyperbolic pattern.
Such value indicates the percentage of C000 motor rated current eventually with
thetrimmer hardware limit (IMAX[T2]). See also figure shown in the CURRENT
LIMIT chapter.
7.2.32 P056: H YPERBOLIC L IMIT S TART S PEED

P056 SpeedHyper1 P P056 - SpeedHyper1
*** % R 0 ... 100 %
D 100 %
F If this speed - expressed as a value per cent of P010 (nFdbkMax) - is exceeded,
the current limit becomes a speed hyperbolic function. See also figure shown in
the CURRENT LIMIT chapter.
WARNING
7.2.33 P057: H YPERBOLIC L IMIT E ND S PEED

P057 SpeedHyper2 P P057 - SpeedHyper2
*** % R 0 ... 100 %
D 100 %
F If this speed - expressed as a value per cent of P010 (nFdbkMax) - is exceeded,
the current limit stops being a speed hyperbolic function and becomes constant
again. See also figure shown in the CURRENT LIMIT chapter.
In this parameter, do not save any value lower than the one saved in EEPROM
WARNING
132/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
7.2.34 P058: C URRENT L IMIT D ECREASE P ER C ENT

P058 Clim P P058 - Clim
*** % R 0 ... 100 %
D 50 %
F Current limit decrease per cent for both bridges following the configured digital
input closing, as long as one parameter among C130 ... C135 is set to 4:Clim.
Such value is to be applied to the present current limit resulting from the
composition of the values set in all relevant parameters (see parameter C000,
parameter set P050 ... P062 - in case of internal limit - and trimmer hardware
limit (IMAX[T2]) - if any).
7.2.35 P059: R AMP O VER THE C URRENT R EFERENCE

P059 dI/dtMax P P059 - dI/dtMax
*** %/s R .01 ... 1.0 %/s
D .40 %/s
F This parameter indicates the max. variation of the current reference in a
microsecond; that variation is expressed as a percentage of the max. value
(100%) corresponding to the drive rated current.
This is the same as imposing - to the current reference - a min. rise ramp time
from zero to 100% and a min. fall ramp time from 100% to zero.
The time (expressed in milliseconds) corresponding to a particular value of such
1
parameter results from the following formula: t = . E.g., the range of
10 P 059
this parameter is equal to 0.1 10ms with a 0.25ms default value.
7.2.36 P060: B RIDGE A C URRENT O VERLIMIT

P060 OverLimA P P060 - OverLimA
*** % R 100 ... 300 %
D 100 %
F Bridge A current limit may be increased by this value per cent, provided that you
program P060 > 100%.
Such value is applied to the present current limit resulting from the composition
of the values set in all relevant parameters (see parameter C000 and parameter
set P050 ... P062 - in case of internal current).
If actual overlimit exceeds the value stated in the OVERLOAD CAPABILITY TABLE,
WARNING i.e. 150% of the drive rated current for 1m every 10m for Size 1 2A and lower
values for MODULAR.S, then drive overheating alarm (A022) will trip.
133/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
7.2.37 P061: B RIDGE B C URRENT O VERLIMIT

P061 OverLimB P P061 - OverLimB (used in DCREG4 only)
*** % R 100 ... 300 %
D 100 %
F Bridge B current limit may be increased by this value per cent, provided that you
program P061 > 100%. This function is to be found in DCREG4 only.
Such value is applied to the present current limit resulting from the composition
of the values set in all relevant parameters (see parameter C000 and parameter
set P050 ... P062 - in case of internal limit).
If actual overlimit exceeds the value stated in the OVERLOAD CAPABILITY TABLE,
WARNING i.e. 150% of the drive rated current for 1m every 10m for Size 1 2A and lower
values for MODULAR.S, then drive overheating alarm (A022) will trip.
7.2.38 P062: O VERLIMIT D IGITAL O UTPUT D ELAY

P062 TFullOvLim P P062 - TFullOvLim
**** sec R .200 ... 60.0 s
D 2.00 s
F When this time, expressed in seconds, is over, if the drive is still in current
overlimit, the 6:FullOverLimit function is enabled, which is programmed in one of
the configurable digital outputs. Said output is disabled as soon as the drive is no
longer in overlimit mode.
7.2.39 P070(076): SPEED LOOP PROPORTIONAL GAIN (SECOND GAIN)

P070 - KpSpeed
P070 KpSpeed P
P076 - KpSpeed2
****
R .100 ... 100.
P076 KpSpeed2 D 4.00
**** F P070: Speed loop proportional gain.
P076: Speed loop second proportional gain.
These parameters represent the Kp speed loop proportional gain with the
following transfer function:
1
G( s ) = K p 1 +
sT i
used for regulation and computed by the speed autotuning.
This gain is represented by par. P070 if the digital input configured by setting one
of par. C130 C135 to 8:Second ParmSet is open, or it is represented by par.
P076 if this digital input is closed.
134/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
7.2.40 P071(077): S PEED L OOP I NTEGRAL T IME (S ECOND T IME )

P071 - TiSpeed
P071 TiSpeed P
P077 - TiSpeed2
**** sec
R .010 ... 5.00 s
P077 TiSpeed2 D 1.00 s
**** sec F P071: Speed loop integral time.
P077: Speed loop second integral time.
These parameters represent, in seconds, integral time Ti of the speed loop
having the following transfer function:
1
G( s ) = K p 1 +
sTi
used for regulation and computed by the speed autotuning. This time is
represented by par. P071 if the digital input configured by setting one of par.
C130 C135 to 8:Second ParmSet is open, or it is represented by par. P077 if
this digital input is closed.
7.2.41 P073(079): S PEED L OOP A DAPTED P ROPORTIONAL G AIN

(S ECOND G AIN )
P073 - KpSpeedAdapt
P073 KpSpdAdapt P
P079 - KpSpeedAdapt2
****
R .100 ... 100.
P079 KpSpdAdapt2 D 4.00 s
**** F P073: Speed loop adapted proportional gain.
P079: Speed loop adapted second proportional gain.
If the parameter Automatic Adaptation is enabled (par. P082 set at 1:YES) and
Verr (M002 up to SW Vers. D3.7) > Verr2 (P084), these parameters represent the
proportional gain used for regulation. The value used is the one set in par. P073
if the digital input configured by setting one of par. C130 ... C135 to 8:Second
ParmSet is open, or it is represented by par. P079 if this digital input is closed.
See also the SPEED PARAMETER AUTOADAPTATION chapter.
7.2.42 P074(080): S PEED L OOP A DAPTED I NTEGRAL T IME

(S ECOND T IME )
P074 - TiSpeedAdapt
P074 TiSpdAdapt P
P080 - TiSpeedAdapt2
**** sec
R .010 ... 5.00 s
P080 TiSpdAdapt2 D 1.00 s
**** sec F P074: Sped loop adapted integral time.
P080: Speed loop adapted second integral time.
If the parameter Automatic Adaptation is enabled (par. P082 set at 1:YES) and
Verr (M002 up to SW Vers. D3.7) > Verr2 (P084), these parameters represent the
integral time used for regulation. The value used is the one set in par. P074 if the
digital input configured by setting one of par. C130 ... C135 to 8:Second
ParmSet is open, or it is represented by par. P080 if this digital input is closed.
See also the SPEED PARAMETER AUTOADAPTATION chapter.
135/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
7.2.43 P082: S PEED PARAMETER A UTO A DAPTATION

P082 AdaptCtrl P P082 - AdaptCtrl
*** R 0 ... 1
D 0
F This parameter enables the speed parameter auto adaptation following the error
variation according to what has been mentioned in parameters P083 and P084
to avoid possible speed overshoots which could occur in case of quick reference
variations at constant load (current limit drive), or temporary speed losses in case
of quick load variations at constant reference.
0:No. The auto adaptation is not enabled.
1:Yes. The auto adaptation is enabled.
In both cases a different programmation is needed: in the first event, parameters

are to be set not only for a proportional gain increase, but also for an integral
NOTE time increase. In the second case, it is necessary to set an integral time
decreasing besides the proportional gain increase. See also SPEED PARAMETER
AUTOADAPTATION chapter.
7.2.44 P083: F IRST S PEED E RROR FOR A UTO A DAPTATION

P083 Verr1 P P083 - Verr1
**** % R 0.00 ... 100 %
D .500 %
F This is the speed error value, expressed as a percentage of the max. error
corresponding to 10V, below which the speed PI will use parameters P070 and
P071 or P076 and P077, should the digital input configured by setting one
parameter among C130 ... C135 to 8:Second ParmSet be respectively open or
closed.
WARNING for P084, as this will cause the drive malfunction. See also SPEED PARAMETER
AUTOADAPTATION chapter.
7.2.45 P084: S ECOND S PEED E RROR FOR A UTO A DAPTATION

P084 Verr2 P P084 - Verr2
**** % R 0.00 ... 100 %
D 1.00 %
F This is the speed error value, expressed as a percentage of the max. error
corresponding to 10V, above which the speed PI (as long as the Parameter
Autoadaptation is enabled - parameter P082 set to 1:YES) will use parameters
P073 and P074 or P079 and P080, should the digital input configured by setting
one parameter among C130 ... C135 to 8:Second ParmSet be respectively open
or closed.
In this parameter, do not save any value lower than the one saved in EEPROM
WARNING For P083, as this will cause the drive malfunction.
See also SPEED PARAMETER AUTOADAPTATION chapter.
136/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
7.2.46 P085: S PEED I NTEGRAL T IME I NCREMENT D URING R AMP

P085 TiRampScale P P085 - TiRampScale
x **** R x1 ... x1000
D x1
F Multiplication factor of the speed PI integral time during the ramp transient set
inside the drive.
7.2.47 P086: A RMATURE C OMPENSATION

P086 ArmatureCmp P P086 - ArmatureCmp
*** % R 0 ... 100 %
D 100%
F Value of the compensation of RxI resistive drop in the motor so as to adjust the
speed (back-electromotive force) using Varm as a feedback.
It expresses, as a percentage of the value set in par. P088 (RxI), the quantity used
in the armature resistive drop compensation. 100% of this parameter
corresponds to par. P088 whole value used for compensation.
7.2.48 P087: O FFSET OVER THE S PEED E RROR

P087 VerrOffset P P087 - VerrOffset
****** % R -1.000 ... 1.000 %
D 0.000 %
F This parameter, using the value per cent of the max. reference corresponding to
10V, allows the offset fine-tuning at the output of the speed loop, i.e. of the
speed error.
You may adjust this parameter whenever the motor tends to turn slowly even if
the speed / voltage reference is equal to zero.
The value set in this parameter is neither subject to the polarity limits relating to
parameter P012 nor to any min. and/or max. value imposed by parameters
P013 P016.
7.2.49 P088: A RMATURE R ESISTIVE D ROP

P088 RxI P P088 RxI
*** R 0 ... 100 V
D 0V
F This parameter, expressed in Volts, indicates the motor armature resistive drop
with a current equal to the drive nominal current, which is computed by the
autotuning function - set par. P001 at 3:RxI.
This parameter value is generally used to compute the back-electromotive force
and to display it in par. M007 (BEMF). This value is also used for the armature
resistive drop compensation both for the dynamic regulation of the field current
in field weakening mode and in the armature feedback (as a percentage set in
par. P086).
A software lock exists avoiding increasing par. P088 value until the value set in
WARNING
par. P011 (VarmMax) is exceeded.
WARNING
137/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
7.2.50 P100: C URRENT L OOP P ROPORTIONAL G AIN

P100 KpCurr P P100 - KpCurr
**** R .005 ... 1.50 (from SW Vers. D3.09; .005 ... 1.00 up to SW Vers. D3.07)
D .200
F If the current loop operation has been programmed by setting parameter C051
to 0:PI operating, this parameter will indicate proportional gain Kp of the current
loop, with the following transfer function:
1
G( s ) = K p +
sTi
used for the control.
7.2.51 P101: C URRENT L OOP I NTEGRAL T IME WITH

D ISCONTINUOUS C URRENT C ONDUCTION
P101 TiCurrDisc P P101 - TiCurrDisc
**** ms R 1.00 ... 100. ms
D 1.30 ms
to 0:PI operating, this parameter will indicate integral time Ti (expressed in
milliseconds)of the current loop, with the following transfer function:
1
G( s ) = K p +
sTi
used for the control in case of discontinuous current conduction, i.e. whenever
the output current is left at zero for given time intervals. A decrease in the value
set in this parameter determines a faster switch off of the active bridge during
reversal.
7.2.52 P102: C URRENT L OOP I NTEGRAL T IME WITH C ONTINUOUS

C URRENT C ONDUCTION
P102 TiCurrCont P P102 - TiCurrCont
**** ms R 2.00 ... 320 ms
D 32.0 ms
to 0:PI operating, this parameter will indicate integral time Ti - expressed in
milliseconds - of the current loop, with the following transfer function:
1
G( s ) = K p +
sTi
used for the control in case of discontinuous current conduction, i.e. whenever
the output current is left at zero for given time intervals. A decrease in the value
set in this parameter determines a faster dynamic response to a reference step.
138/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
7.2.53 P103: A RMATURE E QUIVALENT R ESISTIVE D ROP

P103 RxI Pred P P103 - Rxl Pred
***** V R 0.000 ... 283.6 V
D 70.92 V
to 1:Predictive=>J1, this parameter will indicate, in Volts, the value of the motor
armature equivalent resistive drop, with a current value equal to the drive rated
value. The equivalent armature resistive drop takes account of the electric ratings
of the motor as well as the control chain.
7.2.54 P104: A RMATURE E QUIVALENT I NDUCTIVE D ROP

P104 LdI/dt Pred P P104 - LdI/dt Pred
***** V R 0.000 ... 2.828 V
D 0.707 V
to 1:Predictive=>J1, this parameter will indicate, in Volts, the value of the motor
armature equivalent inductive drop, with a current variation - in a millisecond -
from zero to the drive rated value, that is calculated by the current autotuning.
7.2.55 P110: F IELD R EGULATOR V OLTAGE L OOP P ROPORTIONAL

G AIN
P110 KpFld P P110 - KpFld
**** R .050 ... 100.
D 2.00
F Proportional gain Kp of the field regulator voltage loop, with the following
transfer function:
1
G( s ) = K p 1 +

sTi
used for regulation.
7.2.56 P111: F IELD R EGULATOR V OLTAGE L OOP I NTEGRAL T IME

P111 TiFld P P111 - TiFld
**** sec R .100 ... 1.00 s
D .100 s
F This parameter indicates, in seconds, integral time Ti of the field regulator
voltage loop, with the following transfer function:
1
G( s ) = K p 1 +
sTi
used for regulation.
139/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
7.2.57 P120: S PEED / V OLTAGE M AIN I NPUT P OLARITY

P120 VrefPol P P120 - VrefPol
*** R 0 ... 2
D 0
F This parameter sets the polarity allowed for REF main reference between
terminals 5 and 7 AFTER applying Gain and Bias operators. This is true only if
this input is a speed / voltage reference, i.e. when the digital input programmed
for the 6:Slave function is open (see par. C130 C135).
If you program a unipolar REF reference, the reference of the opposite polarity
will be shut and considered as equal to zero.
7.2.58 P121: S PEED / V OLTAGE M AIN I NPUT B IAS

P121 VrefBias P P121 - VrefBias
******% R -400.0 ... 400. %
D 0.000 %
F This parameter represents, as a percentage of the max. value corresponding to
10V, the reference value obtained when the signal applied to the REF main input
between terminals 5 and 7 is equal to zero. Signal V2 obtained when applying
the Gain and Bias operators to signal V1 is given by the following formula:
P122 P121
V2 = V1 + 10
100 100
This is true if this signal is a speed / voltage reference, i.e. when the digital input
programmed for the 6:Slave function is open (see par. C130 C135).
7.2.59 P122: S PEED / V OLTAGE M AIN I NPUT G AIN

P122 VrefGain P P122 - VrefGain
******% R -800.0 ... 800.0 %
D 100.0 %
F This parameter represents the amplification which is internally applied to the REF
main reference signal between terminals 5 and 7, before being summed to the
Bias. Signal V2 obtained when applying the Gain and Bias operators to signal V1
is given by the following formula:
P122 P121
V2 = V1 + 10
100 100
This is true if this signal is a speed / voltage reference, i.e. when the digital input
programmed for the 6:Slave function is open (see par. C130 C135).
140/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
7.2.60 P123: M AIN C URRENT I NPUT P OLARITY

P123 IrefPol P P123 - IrefPol
*** R 0 ... 2
D 0
F This parameter sets the allowable polarity for the REF main input between
terminals 5 and 7 AFTER applying the Gain and Bias operators. This is true if this
input is a current reference, i.e. when the digital input programmed for the
6:Slave function (see par. C130 C135) is closed.
If you program a unipolar REF reference, the reference with the opposite polarity
will be shut and considered as equal to zero.
7.2.61 P124: C URRENT M AIN I NPUT B IAS

P124 IrefBias P P124 - IrefBias
******% R -400.0 ... 400.0 %
D 0.000 %
F This parameter represents, as a percentage of the max. reference corresponding
to 10V, the reference value obtained when the signal applied to the REF main
input between terminals 5 and 7 is equal to zero. Signal V2 obtained when
applying the Gain and Bias operators to signal V1 is given by the following
formula:
P125 P124
V2 = V1 + 10
100 100
This is true if this signal is a current reference, i.e. when the digital input
programmed for the 6:Slave function is closed (see par. C130 ...C135).
7.2.62 P125: C URRENT M AIN I NPUT G AIN

P125 IrefGain P P125 - IrefGain
******% R -800.0 ... 800.0 %
D 100.0 %
F This parameter represents the amplification which is internally applied to the REF
main reference between terminals 5 and 7, before being summed to the Bias.
Signal V2 obtained when applying the Gain and Bias operators to signal V1 is
given by the following formula:
P125 P124
V2 = V1 + 10
100 100
This is true if this signal is a current reference, i.e. when the digital input
programmed for the 6:Slave function is closed (see par. C130 ...C135).
With two drives in MASTER / SLAVE configuration, as the reference standard level
supplied by the MASTER drive is 5V at the nominal current (M003 = 100%), if
NOTE also the SLAVE drive must supply its nominal current - with said reference at REF
main reference between terminals 5 and 7 - gain P125 (IrefGain) is to be set at
200%.
141/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
7.2.63 P126(129)(132): P OLARITY FOR A UXILIARY A NALOG I NPUT

1(2)(3
P AnInxPol P P126(129)(132) AnIn1(2)(3)Pol
*** R 0 ... 2
D 0
F P126: Polarity for auxiliary analog input 1 (IN 1) to terminals 11 and 13.
P129: Polarity for auxiliary analog input 2 (IN 2) on terminal 17.
P132: Polarity for auxiliary analog input 3 (IN 3) on terminal 19.
This parameter sets the allowable polarity for auxiliary reference 1(2)(3) (IN x)
AFTERapplying the Gain and Bias operators.
If a unipolar auxiliary reference is programmed, the reference of the opposite
polarity - if any - will be shut and considered as equal to zero.
7.2.64 P127(130)(133): A UXILIARY A NALOG I NPUT 1(2)(3) B IAS

P AnInxBias P P127(130)(133) - AnIn1(2)(3)Bias
****** % R -400.0 ... 400.0 %
D 0.000 %
F P127: Bias for auxiliary analog input 1 to terminals 11 and 13.
P130: Bias for auxiliary analog input 2 on terminal 17.
P133: Bias for auxiliary analog input 3 on terminal 19.
This parameter indicates, as a percentage of the max. reference corresponding
to 10V, the reference value obtained when the signal applied to the terminal
board is equal to zero.
Signal V2 obtained when applying the Gain and Bias operators to signal V1 is
given by the following formula:
P ... [Gain ] P ... [Bias ]
V2 = V1 + 10
100 100
7.2.65 P128(131)(134): AUXILIARY ANALOG INPUT 1(2)(3) GAIN

P AnInxGain P P128(131)(134) - AnIn1(2)(3)Gain
****** % R -800.0 ... 800.0 %
D 100.0 %
F P128: Gain for analog input 1 to terminals 11 and 13.
P131: Gain for analog input 2 on terminal 17.
P134: Gain for analog input 3 on terminal 19.
This parameter indicates the amplification which is internally applied to the signal
in the terminal board before summing the Bias. Signal V2 obtained when
applying the Gain and Bias operators to signal V1 is given by the following
formula:
P ... [Gain ] P ... [Bias ]
V2 = V1 + 10
100 100
142/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
7.2.66 P150(153): A NALOG O UTPUT 1(2) C ONFIGURATION

P AnOutxCfg P P150(153) - AnOut1(2)Cfg
*** R 0 ... 13
D 0
F P150: It indicates the configuration of analog output 1 (OUT 1) to terminal 8.
P153: It indicates the configuration of analog output 2 (OUT 2) to terminal 10.
0:0 Volt. 0 Volt.
1:Ramped Vref. Ramp block output: 10V at 100% of the max. reference.
2:Speed Error. Speed error: 10V with Verr (M002 up to SW Vers. D3.7) = 100%.
3:SpeedLoop OUT. Speed loop output, i.e. input signal of current limitation lock:
10V with the n setpoint global speed / voltage reference at 128% of the max.
value, the feedback (M001) at 0% and the proportional gain (P070, P076, P073
or P079 depending on the circumstances) equal to 1 (supposing that only the
proportional part of PI regulator is active).
4:Current Ref. Current reference: 5V with M003 = 100%. For a drive pair having
a MASTER / SLAVE configuration, the current reference to be given by the master
drive may be obtained on terminal 8(10) if P150(153) = 4:Current ref.
5:BackEMF. Back-electromotive force: 5V with M007 =511V.
6:Output Power. Power resulting from the product of the output voltage by the
output current: 10V with M006 = 800V and M004 = 150% of the drive rated
current. E.g. if M006 = 400V and with the drive rated current (e.g. 100A for a
DCREG.100), the analog output value will be 3.33V.
7:Inertia Comp. Three-value signal for the external synchronization of the inertia
compensation during tension tests. Throughout the acceleration ramp: -10V, with
rated speed: 0V, throughout the deceleration ramp: +10V.
8:nFdbk. Speed feedback signal (voltage): 10V with M001 = 100%
9:ArmatureCurr. Armature current feedback signal. The value is 6.67V according
to the rated current of the drive (e.g. 100A for a DCREG.100).
10:FieldCurrent. Field current feedback signal. The value is 10V according to the
drive rated current, whose standard values are 5A for DCREG.100max, 15A for
DCREG.150min Size 1 and 35A for DCREG Size 2(A) and MODULAR.S.
11:Motor Torque. Signal of the motor torque resulting from the product of the
armature current by the field current. Its value is 6.67V with the motor armature
nominal current (defined by par. C000) and by the motor field nominal current
(defined by par. C010).
12:FieldBus1. Analog signal 1 reiterated at output, resulting from the conversion
of an analog quantity sent by the field bus at input.
13:FieldBus2. Analog signal 2 reiterated at output, resulting from the conversion
of an analog quantity sent by the field bus at input.
The above-mentioned Volt values which can be obtained by the two analog
outputs relate to jumpers JP9 and JP10 of board ES801 (JP409 and JP4010 in
ES906) in pos. 1-2. Should they be placed in pos. 2-3, the two analog outputs
NOTE
will deliver only an outgoing current signal equal to 0 ... 20mA from the terminal:
in this case, the value to be set on the parameters relating to Gain and Bias
operators is shown in the MILLIAMPERE INPUT / OUTPUT SIGNALS chapter.
143/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
7.2.67 P151(154): A NALOG O UTPUT 1(2) B IAS

P AnOutxBias P P151(154) - AnOut1(2)Bias
****** % R -400.0 ... 400.0 %
D 0.000 %
F P151: Bias for analog output 1 on terminal 8.
P154: Bias for analog output 2 on terminal 10.
This parameter indicates, as a percentage of the max. signal corresponding to
10V, the value of the signal generated in the terminal board when the internal
signal is equal to zero. Signal V2 obtained when applying the Gain and Bias
operators to signal V1 is given by the following formula:
P ... [Gain ] P ... [Bias ]
V2 = V1 + 10
100 100
7.2.68 P152(155): A NALOG O UTPUT 1(2) G AIN

P AnOutxGain P P152(155) - AnOut1(2)Gain
****** % R -800.0 ... 800.0%
D 100.0 %
F P152: Gain for analog output 1 on terminal 8
P155: Gain for analog output 2 on terminal 10
This parameter indicates the amplification that is internally applied to the
generated signal before summing the Bias. Signal V2 obtained when applying
the Gain and Bias operators to signal V1 is given by the following formula:
P ... [Gain ] P ... [Bias ]
V2 = V1 + 10
100 100
7.2.69 P156: A NALOG IO UT P OLARITY ON T ERMINAL 6

P AnOutxGain P P156 - IOutPol (used in DCREG4 only)
*** R 0 ... 1
D DCREG4: 0
DCREG2: 1(not used)
F This parameter defines the range of current analog output I Out on terminal 6. It
is available in DCREG4 only.
0:Bipolar. Bipolar range: the ammeter connected is to be a central-zero one.
1:Positive only. Unipolar range: the ammeter connected is NOT to be a central-
zero one.
144/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
7.2.70 P157(158): A NALOG OUTPUT POLARITY 1(2)

P AnOutxPol P P157(158) - AnOut1(2)Pol
*** R 0 ... 1
D 0
F P157: Polarity with which the signal in Volt can be generated by analog output 1
on terminal 8
P158: Polarity with which the signal in Volt can be generated by analog output 2
on terminal 10
0:Bipolar. Bipolar range.
1:Positive only. Unipolar range, only positive in the two above mentioned
outputs.
This parameter is active only if the signal set on the analog output is a voltage
signal (-10 ... 10V) (jumper JP9 and/or JP10 in pos. 1-2). If a current signal (0 ...
NOTE 20mA) (jumper JP9 and/or JP10 in pos. 2-3) is to be brought to the output at
issue, polarity may not be defined, as the current direction is the one outgoing
from the terminal towards zero volt
145/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
7.2.71 P170(176)(182)(188)(194): D IGITAL O UTPUT

1(2)(3)(4)(5) C ONFIGURATION
P MDOxCfg P P170(176)(182)(188)(194) - MDO1(2)(3)(4)(5)Cfg
*** R 0 ... 13 (from SW Vers. D3.09; 0 ... 11 up to SW Vers. D3.07)
D P170: 0
P176: 1
P182: 2
P188: 5
P194: 4
F P170: It indicates the configuration of digital output 1 (MDO 1) to terminals 25
and 27.
P176: It indicates the configuration of digital output 2 (MDO 2) to terminals 29
and 31.
and 35.
and 39.
and 43.
0:Drive OK. No alarm is active.
1:SpeedThreshold. The speed / voltage threshold set has been overcome.
2:Iarm Threshold. The armature current threshold set has been overcome.
3:Motor at Speed. The speed / voltage set at the ramp circuit input has been
reached - i.e. the ramp transient has been performed. This function is enabled as
long as the drive is running.
4:CurrLimitation. The drive is in a current limit state, i.e. the armature current is
at the max. value allowed at that moment.
5:Drive Running. The drive is running (it is controlling).
6:Full OverLimit. The drive has been in a current overlimit state throughout the
time set in P062.
7: Fld Weakening. The dynamic regulation of the field current in field weakening
mode is in progress.
8: Ifld Threshold. The field current threshold set has been overcome.
9:Vref Threshold. The reference threshold has been overcome.
10:No warnings. No warning is displayed on the Status page.
11:FieldBus. Relay contact reiterated at output, resulting from the conversion of a
digital signal sent by the field bus at input.
From SW Vers. D3.09 only:
12:OUT Timer A. Same output signal as the signal sent to one of configurable
digital inputs MDIx if one of them is set as 19:IN TimerA. This signal is
reproduced based on timing set for MDO1(2)(3)(4)(5)OnDelay and
MDO1(2)(3)(4)(5)OffDly and based on logics set for MDO1(2)(3)(4)(5)Logic.
13:OUT Timer B. Same output signal as the signal sent to one of configurable
digital inputs MDIx if one of them is set as 20:IN TimerB. This signal is
reproduced based on timing set for MDO1(2)(3)(4)(5)OnDelay and
MDO1(2)(3)(4)(5)OffDly and based on logics set for MDO1(2)(3)(4)(5)Logic.
The indication provided by the digital input configured as 3:Motor at Speed does
WARNING
not consider any additional speed reference.
146/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
7.2.72 P171(177)(183)(189)(195): D IGITAL O UTPUT

1(2)(3)(4)(5) O N D ELAY
P MDOxOnDelay P P171 (177)(183)(189)(195) - MDO1(2)(3)(4)(5)OnDelay
***** sec R 0.000 ... 600.0 s
D 0.000 s
F P171: Delay time, expressed in seconds, enabling digital output 1 to terminals
25 and 27.
P177: Delay time, expressed in seconds, enabling digital output 2 to terminals
29 and 31.
33 and 35.
37 and 39.
41 and 43.
This parameter indicates, in seconds, the delay time that actually enables the
digital output starting from the time when all necessary requirements are met.
See also figure in the CONFIGURABLE DIGITAL OUTPUTS chapter.
7.2.73 P172(178)(184)(190)(196): D IGITAL O UTPUT

1(2)(3)(4)(5) O FF D ELAY
P MDOxOffDly P P172(178)(184)(190)(196) - MDO1(2)(3)(4)(5)OffDly
***** sec R 0.000 ... 600.0 s
D 0.000 s
F P172: Delay time, expressed in seconds, disabling digital output 1 to terminals
25 and 27.
P178: Delay time, expressed in seconds, disabling digital output 2 to terminals
29 and 31.
33 and 35.
37 and 39.
41 and 43.
This parameter indicates, in seconds, the delay time that actually disables the
digital output starting from the time when all necessary requirements are met.
See also figure in the CONFIGURABLE DIGITAL OUTPUTS chapter.
147/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
7.2.74 P173(179)(185)(191)(197): D IGITAL O UTPUT

1(2)(3)(4)(5) S WITCHING L EVEL
P MDOxLevel P P173(179)(185)(191)(197) - MDO1(2)(3)(4)(5)Level
*** % R 0 ... 200 %
D P173: 50%
P179: 3 %
P185: 50%
P191: 5 %
P197: 50%
F P173: Speed / voltage level, current level, error level or reference level for the
switching of digital output 1 to terminals 25 and 27 (if it is set according to one
of said indications).
P179: Speed / voltage level, current level, error level or reference level for the
switching of digital output 2 to terminals 29 and 31(if it is set according to one of
said indications).
The digital output configured as 1:SpeedThreshold enables when the speed

absolute value in M001 (nFdbk) is higher than this parameter value. The
digital output configured as 2:Iarm Threshold enables when the current
absolute value in M004 (Iarm) - expressed as a percentage of the drive
armature nominal current, is higher than this parameter value. The digital
output configured as 8:Ifld Threshold enables when the current in M018 (Ifld) -
expressed as a percentage of the drive field nominal current - is higher than
NOTE
this parameter value. Similarly, the digital output configured as 9:VrefThreshold
enables when the speed error absolute value between the Vref reference
displayed on the KeyPad becomes higher than this parameters value. Finally,
the digital input configured as 3:Motor at Speed enables when the speed error
absolute value between the ramp circuit input reference and the speed /
voltage feedback is lower than this parameter value. This means that the actual
speed has reached the programmed setpoint; i.e. the ramp transient is over.
The level value set in these parameters cannot be lower than the value set in
NOTE
MDOxHyst-type parameters.
To avoid any drive malfunction, never save a value lower than the one saved in
WARNING
EEPROM for MDOxHyst-type parameters.
148/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
7.2.75 P174(180)(186)(192)(198): D IGITAL O UTPUT

1(2)(3)(4)(5) S WITCHING H YSTERESIS
P MDOxHyst P P174(180)(186)(192)(198) - MDO1(2)(3)(4)(5)Hyst
** % R 0 ... 200 %
D 2%
F P174: Hysteresis level for the enabling/disabling of digital output 1 to term. 25
and 27.
P180: Hysteresis level for the enabling / disabling of digital output 2 to term. 29
and 31.
and 35.
and 39.
and 43.
This parameter defines the switching hysteresis of the digital output considered
NOTE below the value fixed by MDOxLevel. See also figure in the CONFIGURABLE
DIGITAL OPUTPUTS.
The hysteresis value set in these parameters may not exceed the level value set in
NOTE
MDOxLevel-type parameters.
To avoid any drive malfunction, never save a value higher than the one saved in
WARNING
EEPROM for MDOxLevel-type parameters.
7.2.76 P175(181)(187)(193)(199): D IGITAL O UTPUT

1(2)(3)(4)(5) C ONTACT L OGIC
P MDOxLogic P P175(181)(187)(193)(199) - MDO1(2)(3)(4)(5)Logic
*** R 0 ... 1
D 0
F P175: It indicates the contact state when digital output 1 to term. 25 and 27 is
disabled.
P181: It indicates the contact state when digital output 2 to term. 29 and 31 is
disabled.
disabled.
disabled.
disabled.
0:Normally Open. When the output enables, the relevant relay energizes and
the contact on the relevant terminals closes.
1:Normally Closed. When the output enables, the relevant relay de-energizes
and the contact on the related terminals opens. See also figure in the
CONFIGURABLE DIGITAL OUTPUTS chapter.
149/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
7.2.77 P211(212)(213)(214)(215)(216)(217): P RESET R UN

R EFERENCE 1(2)(3)(4)(5)(6)(7
P211 (212)(213)(214)(215)(216)(217): Preset Run Reference
P PresetSpdx P
1(2)(3)(4)(5)(6)(7)
***** % P P211 (212)(213)(214)(215)(216)(217) - PresetSpd1(2)(3)(4)(5)(6)(7)
R -100. ... 100. %
D P211: 5.00 %
P212: 20.0 %
P213: 10.0 %
P214: 0.00 %
P215: -5.00 %
P216: -20.0 %
P217: -10.0 %
F P211: Preset run reference PresetSpd1.
P212: Preset run reference PresetSpd2.
These references are speed / voltage references to be used instead of the Main
Ref reference. Their polarity may be reversed using the Reverse function. If a
digital input programmed for the 6:Slave function (see par. C130 C135) is
closed, or if par. C050 has been directly programmed for the 3:Iref=Vref
function, then the above-mentioned preset run references become current
references.
When a run preset reference is entered, the START digital input is to be enabled.
SELECTION: Among the seven preset run references to be stored, the valid one results from the closing of
one or more digital inputs that have been properly configured.
If three digital inputs are set to 1:Preset Speed A, 2:Preset Speed B and 3:Preset Speed C, the preset run
reference is determined by the table below, where a blank square indicates the digital input opening state
(or the input that has not been set) and the black square indicates the closing state:
Selected run reference PresetSpdC PresetSpdB PresetSpdA

Main Ref
PresetSpd1
PresetSpd2
PresetSpd3
PresetSpd4
PresetSpd5
PresetSpd6
PresetSpd7
Among the seven preset run references, if you want to select only the first three ones, you just need to set
two digital inputs as 1:Preset Speed A and 2:Preset Speed B. For one reference only, you just need to set
one input to 1:Preset Speed A (first input), 2:Preset Speed B (second input), 3:Preset Speed C (fourth input).
150/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
7.2.78 P221: J OG R AMP S ELECTION

P221 JogSelect P P221 - JogSelect
*** R 0 ... 2
D 0
F This parameter defines the ramps to be assigned to the jog references.
0:Common Ramps. The jog references pass through common ramps P030,
P031, P032, P033. When the jog digital input opens, ramp P034 or P035 takes
place, depending on the polarity programmed.
1:Without Ramps. The jog references are directly taken.
2:Separate Ramps. The jog references pass through separate ramps P036,
P037.
Ramp P037 takes place both when the value set in this parameter decreases and
when the jog digital input opens.
7.2.79 J OG R EFERENCE 1(2)(3)

P Jogx P P222(223)(224) - Jog1(2)(3)
***** % R -100. ... 100. %
D P222: 5.00 %
P223: -5.00 %
P224: 0.00 %
F P222: Jog1 Reference.
P223: Jog2 Reference.
P224: Jog3 Reference.
These references are speed / voltage references whose polarity may be reversed
by applying the Reverse function. If a digital input programmed for the 6:Slave
function (see par. C130 C135) is closed, or if par. C050 has been directly
programmed for the 3:Iref=Vref, then the above-mentioned jog references
become current references.
SELECTION: Among the three jog references to be stored, the valid one results from the closing of one or
more digital inputs that have been properly configured.
If two digital inputs are set to 12:JogA and 13:JogB, the preset jog reference is determined by the table
below, where a blank square indicates the digital input opening state (or the input that has not been set)
and the black square indicates the closing state:
Selected jog reference JogB JogA

-
Jog1
Jog2
Jog3
If you want to select only one jog reference out of three, you just need to set one input with values 12:JogA
for the first and 13:JogB for the second.
151/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
7.2.80 P230: M IN . F IRING A NGLE

P230 AlfaMin P P230 - AlfaMin
**** R 0.00 ... 80.0
D DCREG4: 30.0
DCREG2: 25.0
F Min. delay angle for the thyristor firing and the energy transfer from the mains to
the load.
This is the limit for parameter M005 (Alfa) when the drive operates as motor.
7.2.81 P231: M AX . F IRING A NGLE

P231 AlfaMax P P231 - AlfaMax
**** R 100. ... 180.
D 150.
F Max. delay angle for the thyristor firing and the energy transfer from the load to
the mains.
This is the limit for parameter M005 (Alfa) when the drive operates as brake.
7.2.82 P240: L OW PASS F ILTER OVER THE S PEED / V OLTAGE E RROR

P240 LowPassCnst P P240 - LowPassConst
**** msec R 0.00 ... 300. ms
D 0.00 ms
F This parameter expresses, in milliseconds, time constant of the low pass filter
for the first speed error operating according to the following transfer function:
1
G( s ) = .
1 + s
7.2.83 P250: U P / D OWN I NTERNAL R EFERENCE P OLARITY

P250 UpDnRefPol P P250 - UpDnRefPol
*** R 0 ... 2
D 0
F This parameter sets the allowable polarity for the UpDownRef internal reference.
See also the MOTOR POTENTIOMETER chapter.
7.2.84 P251: U P / D OWN I NTERNAL R EFERENCE R ESTORATION AT

P OWER O N
P251 UpDnRefMem P P251 - UpDnRefMem
*** R 0 ... 1
D 1
F If set at default value 1:Yes, this parameter restores the last value stored for the
UpDownRef internal reference before or a power failure or the device power off.
Otherwise (0:No setting) this internal reference will always restart from zero. See
also the MOTOR POTENTIOMETER chapter.
0:No. Reset zero value at power on.
1:Yes. Restoration at power on.
152/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
7.3 CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS

The value of the configuration parameters may be defined by the user only when the ENABLE digital input
is not active. These parameters are marked with a C followed by the parameter number.
7.3.1 C000: M OTOR R ATED C URRENT

C000 Inom P C000 - Inom
*** % R 1 ... 100 %
D 100 %
F This parameter sets the motor rated current as a percentage of the drive rated
current.
For instance, for a DCREG.100, 100% of C000 corresponds to 100A.
This parameter is the reference value for all calculations relating to the different
current limits.
7.3.2 C001: C URRENT FOR M OTOR T HERMAL P ROTECTION

C001 MotThrshold P C001 - MotThrshold
*** % R 1 ... 120 %
D 110 %
F This parameter sets - as a percentage of the motor rated current programmed
on parameter C000 - the reference current for the thermal image formation of
motor temperature increase to enable the motor electronic protection agaist
overheating (protection I2t). See also figure in MOTOR HEATING THERMAL
IMAGE chapter.
For instance, in a DCREG.100 where a value equal to C000=80% has been set,
110% of C001corresponds to 88A.
7.3.3 C002: T IME C ONSTANT FOR M OTOR T HERMAL P ROTECTION

C002 MotThConst P C002 - MotThConst
***** sec R 0 ... 10800 s
D 300 s
F This parameter sets, in seconds, the thermal time constant for thermal image
formation of motor temperature increase to enable the motor electronic
protection against overheating (protection I2t). See also figure in MOTOR
HEATING THERMAL IMAGE chapter.
Program C002=0 to disable I2t control.
As a reference, in parameter C002 you can set a value of approx.600 sec for
motors with some hundreds of Ampere, while a value up to 1800 sec may be set
for motors with some thousands of Ampere.
153/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
7.3.4 C010: M OTOR F IELD R ATED C URRENT

C010 IfldNom P C010 - IfldNom
**** % R 0.00 ... 100. %
D 10.0 %
F This parameter is to be always programmed, even if no dynamic regulation of
the field current in field weakening mode is needed. This parameter sets, as a
percentage of the max. field current value supplied by the drive, the motor field
rated current supplied when the motor is not running or when the motor is
rotating at a lower speed than the speed enabling the field regulation.
The value set in this parameter may be reduced from its max. value to zero
through one of the configurable analog inputs by setting par. C120 (121)(122)
to 11:Fld.curr.lim.
The standard values of the max. field current that the drive can deliver are 5A for
DCREG.100max, 15A for DCREG.150min Size 1 and 35A for DCREG Size 2(A)
NOTE
and MODULAR.S.
For instance, for a DCREG.350, 100% of C010 corresponds to 15A.
7.3.5 C011: F IELD W EAKENING S TART R ATED S PEED

C011 BaseSpeed P C011 - BaseSpeed
*** % R 5 ... 100 %
D 33 %
F This parameter shall be programmed only when a dynamic regulation of the
field current in field weakening mode is needed. It sets the speed, expressed as a
percentage of P010 (nFdbkMax), determining the field weakening start.
See also the FIELD REGULATOR chapter.
7.3.6 C012: R ATED A RMATURE V OLTAGE AT F IELD W EAKENING

C012 BaseVarm P C012 - BaseVarm
**** V R 50 ... 1000 V
D 1000V
F It sets, in Volts, the motor nominal armature voltage, already obtained at the
speed determining the field weakening start. To have a field current dynamic
regulation in field weakening mode when the speed changes:
1. set this parameter at a value lower than 1000V
2. with par. C70, set a feedback speed other than value 4:Armature.
If the speed feedback set is the armature feedback, no field current dynamic
regulation in field weakening mode will take place for any value of the actual
parameter.
See also FIELD REGULATOR chapter.
For this parameter, set a lower value than the default value (1000V) only in field
WARNING weakening dynamic regulation mode. Otherwise, if the field current value is to
be kept constant, do not change this parameters default value.
154/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
7.3.7 C014: S TANDSTILL F IELD C URRENT

C014 FldEcoLevel P C014 - FldEcoLevel
*** % R 0 ... 100 %
D 10 %
F This parameter may be programmed even when no dynamic regulation of the
field current in field weakening mode is needed. It represents the current value,
expressed as a percentage of C010 (IfldNom), to which the field must be reduced
when the drive is not running, once the time set at parameter C015
(FldEcoDelay) has elapsed. As soon as the device is supplied at the terminals of
the field rectifier and as long as the run command is not operated, the field
current value supplied is the one set in the current parameter.
The Field Economy function is disabled whenever the motor speed of rotation is
other than zero. See also the FIELD REGULATOR chapter.
7.3.8 C015: S TANDSTILL F IELD C URRENT D ECREASE D ELAY

C015 FldEcoDelay P C015 - FldEcoDelay
*** sec R 0.0 ... 300
D 240 s
field current in field weakening mode is needed. This parameter indicates, in
seconds, the time interval that has to pass before reducing the field current to
value C014 (FldEcoLevel), starting from the time when the drive stops. See also
the FIELD REGULATOR chapter.
7.3.9 C016: F IELD W EAKENING M IN . C URRENT

C016 IfldMinLim P C016 - IfldMinLim
*** % R 10 ... 100 %
D 25 %
F This parameter shall be programmed only when a dynamic regulation of the
field current in field weakening mode is needed. It sets, as a percentage of C010
(IfldNom), the motor field nominal current min. limit during the dynamic
regulation in field weakening mode. Field current can never be lower than the
value of actual parameter, even if speed is at its max value. If the motor speed of
rotation reaches too high and dangerous values, the correct setting of this
parameter allows Alarm A023 (Ifld Underlimit) to trip and the equipment to lock.
Typically, this parameter could be set at 75% of the min. current field rated value
at the max. speed. See also the FIELD REGULATOR chapter.
155/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
7.3.10 C017: B OOST OVER THE F IELD C URRENT

C017 FldFrcLevel P C017 - FldFrcLevel
*** % R 100 ... 120 %
D 100 %
field current in field weakening mode is needed. It represents the value,
expressed as a percentage of C010 (IfldNom), to which the field current is
increased according to the time set at parameter C018 (FldFrcTime), starting
from the very moment when the run command is operated. This is true only
when a digital input configured for the 11:FldFrcEnabled function is closed.
This forcing function (Field Forcing) will be disabled if the armature voltage exceeds the following value
C 030 1.316
, and will be enabled when drive is started again. See also the FIELD REGULATOR chapter.
2
Product C010C017 should not exceed the 100% of the field maximum current
NOTE
to be supplied by the device.
The forcing function may have no effect if the current increase does not produce
NOTE
any remarkable field flux increase.
7.3.11 C018: B OOST D URATION ON F IELD C URRENT

C018 FldFrcTime P C018 - FldFrcTime
*** sec R 0.0 ... 60. s
D 10. s
field current in field weakening mode is needed. This is the time interval,
expressed in seconds, during which the field current is increased according to the
percentage set at parameter C017 (FldFrcLevel) starting from the very moment
when the run command is operated. See also the FIELD REGULATOR chapter.
7.3.12 C030: N OMINAL M AINS V OLTAGE

C030 VmainsNom P C030 VmainsNom
*** V R 10 NNN V
D 400 V
F This parameter sets, in Volts, the three-phase mains voltage nominal value in the
power section.
The upper extreme value to be set (i.e. the maximum three-phase voltage to be
supplied to the power section) indicated as NNN, is factory-set, is shown in the
Status page and depends on the components used for the device manufacturing.
It may be one of the following four values: 440V, 500V, 600V, 690V.
The value set in this parameter controls alarm A016 (Mains OverVoltage), A017
(Mains UnderVoltage) and A010 (Armature OverVoltage) trip (mains overvoltage
or undervoltage and armature overvoltage respectively).
NOTE The value set in this parameter cannot exceed the drive factory-set value.
156/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
7.3.13 C050: S PEED / V OLTAGE L OOP O PERATION

C050 SpdLoopSel P C050 - SpdLoopSel
*** R 1 ... 3
D 1
F This parameter programs the speed loop operating mode.
1:PI operating. The PI regulator proportional and integral sections are both
active.
2:P operating. Only the PI regulator proportional section is active.
3:Iref=Vref. The speed loop is inactive. The current reference is supplied by the
Main Ref (after being transferred to Gain, Bias, Polarity and the Reverse function),
by one of the internal jog references or by one of the preset run references (with
the Reverse function, if necessary). The current reference may be summed to IN 1
reference between terminals 11 and 13, to IN 2 reference on terminal 17 and to
IN 3 reference on terminal 19 as long as they have been configured by setting
C120(121)(122) = 2: I loop add.ref., and after being transferred to Gain, Bias,
Polarity. The current references always enter the control loop with no ramp or
rounding, even if they have been set in parameters P030 ... P039.
If a digital input configured for the 6:Slave function is closed, then this parameter
NOTE
programming cannot be changed.
7.3.14 C051: C URRENT L OOP O PERATION

C051 CurrLoopSel P C051 - CurrLoopSel
*** R 0 ... 1
D 0
F This parameter programs the current loop operating mode.
0:PI operating. The current loop operates through a PI regulator (proportional
part plus integral part). It is recommended that this mode be selected in case of a
DCREG4 in armature feedback or in case of a DCREG2 and generally in all
cases where the resistance torque is much higher than the inertia one, or when
the output bars of the DCREG do not supply a motor but supply a resistive load.
1:Predictive=>J1 (1:Predictive up to SW Vers. D3.09). Current loop operates
with a predictive control. From SW Vers. D4.00: before setting this operating
mode for the current loop and before performing current autotune, set jumper J1
from position 1 to position 0. Jumper J1 is located on board ES729/1 (installed
inside the equipment on control board ES728/2).
7.3.15 C052: F IELD R EGULATOR V OLTAGE L OOP O PERATION

C052 FldLoopSel P C052 - FldLoopSel
*** R 0 ... 1
D 0
F This parameter programs the field regulator voltage loop operating mode.
0:PI operating. Both the PI regulator proportional and integral sections are
active.
1:P operating. Only the PI regulator proportional section is active.
157/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
7.3.16 C060: F IRST Q UADRANT S ELECTION

C060 1stQ-FwdMot P C060 1stQ-FwdMot
*** R 01
D 0
F Operation enabling/disabling of the first work quadrant of the torque / speed
plan. See also figure in the OPERATION QUADRANTS chapter.
0:Enabled. The first quadrant is enabled.
1:Disabled. The first quadrant is disabled.
7.3.17 C061: S ECOND Q UADRANT S ELECTION

C061 2ndQ-RevReg P C061 2ndQ-RevReg
*** R 01
D DCREG4: 0
DCREG2: 0 (DCREG2: 1 up to SW Vers. D4.00)
F Operation enabling/disabling of the second work quadrant of the torque / speed
plan.
See also figure in the OPERATION QUADRANTS chapter.
0:Enabled. The second quadrant is enabled.
1:Disabled. The second quadrant is disabled.
7.3.18 C062: T HIRD Q UADRANT S ELECTION

C062 3rdQ-RevMot P C062 3rdQ-RevMot (used in DCREG4 only
*** R 01
D DCREG4: 0
DCREG2: 1 (not used)
F Operation enabling/disabling of the third work quadrant of the torque / speed
plan. This function is available in DCREG4 only. See also figure in the
OPERATION QUADRANTS chapter.
0:Enabled. The third quadrant is enabled.
1:Disabled. The third quadrant is disabled.
7.3.19 C063: F OURTH Q UADRANT S ELECTION

C063 4thQ-FwdReg P C063 4thQ-FwdReg (used in DCREG4 only)
*** R 01
D DCREG4: 0
DCREG2: 1 (not used)
F Operation enabling/disabling of the fourth work quadrant of the torque / speed
plan.
This function is available in DCREG4 only. See also figure in the OPERATION
QUADRANTS chapter.
0:Enabled. The fourth quadrant is enabled.
1:Disabled. The fourth quadrant is disabled.
158/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
7.3.20 C070: F EEDBACK S ELECTION

C070 nFdbkSelect P C070 - nFdbkSelect
*** R 0 ... 4
D 2
F This parameter selects the signal to be used as a feedback.
0:Tach 825 V. The signal used as a speed feedback is included in the 8 ... 25V
voltage range; the voltage is supplied by a tacho and detected via terminal 20.
1:Tach 2580 V. The signal used as a speed feedback is included in the 25 ...
80V voltage range; the voltage is supplied by a tacho and detected via terminal
22.
2:Tach 80250 V. The signal used as a speed feedback is included in the 80 ...
250V voltage range; the voltage is supplied by a tacho and detected via terminal
23.
3:Encoder. The signal used as a speed feedback is an encoder output detected
via terminals 14 and 16, or via 9-pole D-connector CN2.
4:Armature. The signal used as a voltage feedback is the drive voltage output; in
case of a motor, the voltage feedback is the armature voltage. When the drive
operates according to an armature feedback with a resistive load, parameter
C051 (CurrLoopSel) should be set to the 0:PI operating default value.
In case of a tacho or encoder feedback, the max. motor speed with a speed
reference equal to 100% is programmed through parameter P010 (nFdbkMax);
NOTE
in case of an armature feedback, the max. voltage with a speed reference equal
to 100% is programmed through parameter P011 (VarmMax).
7.3.21 C072: E NCODER P ULSES /R EV

C072 EncoderPls P C072 - EncoderPls
***** pls/R R 100 ... 10000 pulses/rev
D 1024 pulses/rev
F This parameter conveys information about the encoder pulses/rev.
The values set in parameter C072 and parameter P010 should allow product
WARNING C072P010 not to exceed 102.400kHz (e.g. 1024 pulses/rev for 6000 RPM
max.) in order to avoid any drive failure.
7.3.22 C074: TACHO T RANSDUCTION R ATIO

C074 Tach Volts P C074 - TachoConst
*** V/1000 RPM R 5 ... 120 V /1000 RPM
D 60 V / 1000 RPM
F This parameter conveys information about the transduction ratio of the tacho
used for the speed feedback according to a V / 1000 RPM unit of measure.
The values set on parameter C074 and parameter P010 should allow product
WARNING C074P010 not exceed 25V if C070 = 0, 80V if C070 = 1, 250V if C070 =
2. Otherwise, this will cause drive speed control failure.
159/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
7.3.23 C090: A LARM A UTO R ESET N UMBER

C090 AutoReset P C090 - AutoReset
** times R 0 ... 10 times
D 0 times
F This parameter programs the max. number of autoreset retries of an alarm
(autoreset) which may be performed (when 2s have passed since the removal of
the cause generating the alarm) when the minimum time between two resetting
procedures - set on parameter C091 (AutoResTime) - has not passed.
Set C090 = 0 to disable the function.
7.3.24 C091: R ESET T IME OF A UTORESET N UMBER

C091 AutoResTime P C091 - AutoResTime
*** sec R 1 ... 999 s
D 300 s
F This parameter determines, in seconds, the minimum time interval that should
pass from the last reset, before setting the autoreset counter to zero. The counter
may be cleared only by a manual reset when the drive has performed all the
resets programmed on parameter C090 and the cause generating again an
alarm doesnt disappear before the mentioned time interval has passed.
7.3.25 C092: P OWER O N R ESET

C092 PwrOnReset P C092 - PwrOnReset
*** R 0 ...1
D 0
F This parameter determines whether no memorization should be performed in the
EEPROM after an alarm trip, so that the alarm will not be displayed at the
following drive power on (if, of course, the alarm cause has been removed).
0:No. The alarm trip is stored and displayed when the drive is powered on
again.
1:Yes. The alarm trip is not stored, so it is not displayed when the drive is
powered on again.
7.3.26 C093: A UTORESET AFTER M AINS F AILURE

C093 MainsReset P C093 - MainsReset
*** R 0 ... 1
D 1
F This parameter determines whether the drive, in case of a mains break
(regardless of its duration) concerning the power section, is able to perform an
unlimited number of alarm autoresets, in such a way that by restoring the power
supply no alarm is kept stored. As a rule the generating alarm is A007
(MainsFailure), though it may sometimes happen that alarms A006 (Unstable
Frequency), A012 (Frequency out of Range), A013 (Missing Synchronization) or
A017 (Mains Undervoltage) have tripped.
0:No. When the power supply is restored after a mains break on the power
section, one of the above mentioned alarms is kept stored.
1:Yes. When the power supply is restored after a mains break on the power
section, no alarm trip is kept stored.
160/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
7.3.27 C094: S TART S AFETY

C094 StartSafety P C094 - StartSafety
*** R 0 ... 1
D 0
F When the cause of the alarm trip has disappeared and a manual or automatic
reset of the alarm has been performed, this parameter determines whether a
safety preventing the drive to automatically and immediately restart should be
enabled. Of course, this function is active only if the device is actually able to
restart (no alarm detected, power section properly supplied, ENABLE and START
digital inputs closed).
0:No. Device self-start enabled when no alarm conditions are detected, after the
reset or when the power supply is restored.
1:Yes. The device is not allowed to restart by itself when no alarm conditions are
detected, after the reset or when the power supply is restored. By contrast, it may
be restarted only after the ENABLE digital input temporary activation and
deactivation. In that case, warning W004 is displayed (Open-Close ENABLE to
run).
7.3.28 C100: LOCAL / MIXED S ELECTION E NABLING

C100 LocRemSel P C100 - LocRemSel
*** R 0 ... 1
D 0
F This parameter allows the drive switching from the MIXED mode (i.e. from
terminal board, serial communication, field bus or keypad) to the LOCAL mode
only (i.e. from keypad only) and vice versa, by simultaneously pressing the
and SAVE keys.
0:Enabled. Switching (obtained by pressing the two above mentioned keys
simultaneously) enabled.
1:Disabled. Switching (obtained by pressing the two above mentioned keys
simultaneously) disabled.
This parameter may be used to avoid an accidental switching of the drive
operation trough the keypad.
In any operating mode, the drive running procedure always requires the ENABLE
NOTE
contact closing on terminal 24.
7.3.29 C101: D ELAY FROM S TARTING E NABLING

C101 PwrOnTime P C101 - PwrOnTime (from SW Vers. D3.09 only)
**** sec R 0.00 ... 10.0 s
D 10.0 s
F Only if the inductive load type is selected, this parameter indicates the delay time
(in seconds) from the application of supply voltage to the control section before
the first start command is sent.
161/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
7.3.30 C102: Z EROING T IME

C102 ZeroingTime P C102 - ZeroingTime (from SW Vers. D3.09 only)
***** msec R 30.00 ... 3000. ms
D 200.0 ms
F Only if the inductive load type is selected, this parameter indicates the time
period (in milliseconds) after which both bridges are off when reversing.
7.3.31 C103: E MERGENCY S TOP

C103 EmergStop P C103- EmergStop
*** R 0 ...1
D 1
F This parameter defines the operating mode of the STOP key.
0:Included. Regardless of the command sources that have been selected,
pressing the STOP key determines the START digital input contact disabling.
Speed will therefore decrease according to the ramp set in parameter P034
(RampStopPos) or P035 (RampStopNeg), depending on the reference polarity. To
restart the device, open and close the START digital input. In that case, warning
W005 (Open-Close START to run) is displayed.
1:Excluded. This key is active when at least one of the selected sources for the
command setting corresponds to KeyPad. For the interaction of this key with the
START digital inputs coming from other sources, see the Ref n section in the
BLOCK DIAGRAM chapter.
162/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
7.3.32 C105(106)(107)(108): S OURCE R EFERENCE S ELECTION

1(2)(3)(4)
C RefSelx P C105(106)(107)(108) RefSel1(2)(3)(4)
*** R 0 ...4
D C105: 1
C106: 0
C107: 0
C108: 0
F C105: Determines reference source n.1.
C106: Determines reference source n.2.
0:Disabled. This selection does not enable any reference source.
1:Terminal. This selection enables the terminal board as a reference source.
2:UpDownRef. This selection enables the internal Up / Down reference as a
reference source.
3:Serial Link. This selection enables the serial connection as a reference source.
4:FieldBus. This selection enables the field bus as a reference source.
The user may select max. four sources, therefore the MainRef may by equal to
the sum of the references coming from all four available sources. If the same
source is enabled by two or multiple selections, this corresponds to selecting this
source only once.
For each MIXED LOCAL switching performed by simultaneously pressing the

and SAVE keys, the values of the four parameters change as follows:
C105 2:UpDownRef
WARNING C106 0:Disabled
C107 0:Disabled
C108 0:Disabled
These parameters cannot be changed in LOCAL mode.
163/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
7.3.33 C110(111)(112): C OMMAND S OURCE S ELECTION 1(2)(3)

C SeqSelx P C110(111)(112) SeqSel1(2)(3)
*** R 0 ...4
D C110: 1
C111: 0
C112: 0
F C110: Determines command source n.1.
C111: Determines command source n.2.
C112: Determines command source n.3.
0:Disabled. This selection does not enable any command source.
1:Terminal. This selection enables the terminal board as a command source.
2:UpDownRef. This selection enables the internal Up / Down reference as a
command source.
3:Serial Link. This selection enables the serial connection as a command source.
4:FieldBus. This selection enables the field bus as a command source.
The user may select max. three sources, therefore the MainRef may by equal to
the sum of the references coming from all three available sources. If the same
source is enabled by two or multiple selections, this corresponds to selecting this
source only once.
For each MIXED LOCAL switching performed by simultaneously pressing the

and SAVE keys, the values of the four parameters change as follows:
C110 2:KeyPad
WARNING
C111 0:Disabled
C112 0:Disabled
These parameters cannot be changed in LOCAL mode.
164/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
7.3.34 C120(121)(122): A NALOG I NPUT 1(2)(3)

C ONFIGURATION
C AnInxCfg P C120(121)(122): - AnIn1(2)(3)Cfg
*** R 0 ... 11
D 0
F C120: It defines the configuration of programmable analog input 1 (IN 1)
between terminals 11 and 13.
C121: It defines the configuration of programmable analog input 2 (IN 2) on
terminal 17.
C122: It defines the configuration of programmable analog input 3 (IN 3) on
terminal 19.
0:Excluded.
1:n loop add.ref. The reference to analog input IN x is an additional speed /
voltage reference.
2:I loop add.ref. The reference to analog input IN x is an additional current
reference.
3:Ramps reduct. The reference to analog input IN x is a signal for the decrease
per cent of the four ramp times programmed through parameters P030 ... P033.
4:tUP+ reduction. The reference to analog input IN x is a signal for the decrease
per cent of the rise ramp time of positive reference P030.
5:tUP- reduction. The reference to analog input IN x is a signal for the decrease
per cent of the rise ramp time of negative reference P032.
6:tDN+ reduction. The reference to analog input IN x is a signal for the
decrease per cent of the fall ramp time of positive reference P031.
7:tDN- reduction. The reference to analog input IN x is a signal for the decrease
per cent of the fall ramp time of negative reference P033.
8:Ext. curr.lim. The reference to analog input IN x is a current limit external
reference for bridge A only (DCREG2) or for both bridges A and B (DCREG4).
9:BrdgA ext.lim. The reference to analog input IN x is a current limit external
reference for bridge A only in DCREG4. (This function is available for DCREG4
only). Do no set it for DCREG2.
10:BrdgB ext.lim. The reference to analog input IN x is a current limit external
reference for bridge B only in DCREG4. (This function is available for DCREG4
only). Do no set it for DCREG2.
11:Fld. curr.lim. The reference to analog input IN x is a signal for the decrease
per cent of the motor rated current programmed through parameter C010
(IFldNom).
As for the external current limit, at 100% of the internal signal (M010, M011 or
M012) and if we suppose that limit parameters P050 ... P057 are programmed
for 100%, then the current limit will be the one set by C000 motor rated current,
eventually reduced by hardware limit (IMAX[T2]).
On the other hand, if the internal signal is under 100%, the current limit will
proportionally decrease. All this is shown in the diagram, where the polarity to be
NOTE
applied to the external limit signal of both bridges is assumed to be positive (par.
P126(129)(132) (AnInxPol) at1:Positive only), and C000=50%, P050=50% and
P051=100%.
If more than one analogic input has been setup as an external current limit, then
the one with minimum limit resulting in absolute value is considered.
165/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
I LIM A
+25%
An In x
+50% +100%
-50%
I LIM B
As for the ramp time and the motor field rated current external limit, at 100%
of the internal signal (M010, M011 or M012) the above-mentioned values will
correspond to the times internally set through parameters P030 ... P033 and
par. C010 respectively.
On the other hand, if the internal signal is under 100%, said values will
NOTE proportionally decrease. P038 and P039 rounding will be decreased by the
same value per cent as well.
In general, for the external decrease function, the signal applied to the analog
input may have any polarity.
If multiple analog inputs have been configured as an external decrease, the
analog input with the min. value will prevail.
166/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
7.3.35 C130(131)(132)(133)(134)(135): D IGITAL I NPUT

1(2)(3)(4)(5)(6) C ONFIGURATION
C MDIxCfg P C130(131)(132)(133)(134)(135) - MDI1(2)(3)(4)(5)(6)Cfg
*** R 0 ... 20 (from SW Vers. D3.09; 0 ... 18 up to SW Vers. D3.07)
D C130: 0
C131: 12
C132: 13
C133: 1
C134: 4
C135: 5
F C130: It indicates the configuration of programmable digital input 1 (MDI 1)
(terminal 28 if the terminal board is selected).
C131: It indicates the configuration of programmable digital input 2 (MDI 2)
0:Reset. When the input closes, it enables deleting the alarm previously stored.
This is equivalent to simultaneous pressing the PROG and SAVE keys.
1:Preset Speed A. When the input closes, it selects - in conjunction with other
digital inputs programmed with the 2:Preset Speed B and 3:Preset Speed C
functions - a preset run reference among all references programmed in
parameters P211 ... P217, according to the matching table contained in the
section relating to said parameters.
2:Preset Speed B. When the input closes, it selects - in conjunction with other
digital inputs programmed with the 1:Preset Speed A and 3:Preset Speed C
3:Preset Speed C. When the input closes, it selects - in conjunction with other
digital inputs programmed with the 1:Preset Speed A and 2:Preset Speed B
4:Clim. When the input closes, it enables decreasing the actual current limit for
both bridges according the value per cent programmed in P058 (Clim).
5:Reverse. When the input closes, it reverses polarity for the Ref n reference
applied to the ramps (including the preset run references and the internal jog
references), and for the references on auxiliary inputs, provided that they are
configured as speed references.
6:Slave Enabled. When the input closes, it disables the speed loop; the same
function is obtained if parameter C050 is programmed as 3:Iref=Vref. As a
consequence, the current reference is supplied by the Main Ref or by one of the
preset run references or by one of the internal jog references, summed to
references IN 1, IN 2 and IN 3, provided that they have been configured as
additional current references. However, the current reference enter the control
loop with no ramp or rounding, even though they have been programmed in
parameters P030 ... P039.
167/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
F 7:Ramps Disabled. When the input closes, it resets the ramp times programmed
in parameters P030 ... P035 as well as any rounding value programmed in
parameters P038 and P039. When the ramp times and rounding values are to
be brought back to their original values, the digital input is to be opened before
sending the new speed reference; if not, the ramp programmed will not take
place.
8:Second ParmSet. If a motor constantly operates under different conditions
(such as mechanical time constants, gear ratio, inertial moments and so on) that
require separate control parameters for the speed loop, the input closing enables
switching from the parameter standard values to its alternative values.
Particularly, for the proportional gain, integral time, adapted proportional gain,
adapted integral time, the values programmed in P070 ... P074 will switch to
the values programmed in P076 ... P080 respectively. For the first two
parameters, the speed auto tuning will calculate the standard or alternative
values depending on the state of the digital input concerned.
9:MinSpdDisabled. If you set parameter P012 (SpdDmndPol) to 1:Positive only
or 2:Negative only, when the input closes this function will disable the min. speed
positive reference programmed in parameter P014 (nMinPos) or the min. speed
negative reference programmed in parameter P016 (nMinNeg).
10:Ext Failure 1. Alarm A020 trips when the input opens.
11:FldFrcEnabled. When this input is closed, it increases the field current to the
value possibly set at parameter C017 (FldFrcLevel) and according to the time
programmed at parameter C018 (FldFrcTime).
12:JogA. When this input is closed, it selects, together with another possible
digital input programmed with function 13:JogB, a jog reference among the ones
programmed on parameter P222 ... P224, according to the corresponding
matching table.
13:JogB. When this input is closed, it selects, together with another possible
digital input programmed with function 12:JogA, a jog reference among the
ones programmed on parameter P222 ... P224, according to the corresponding
matching table.
14:Up. When this input closes, it increases the value of the UpDownRef internal
reference with respect to the ramp set in par. P040 (UpDnRefRamp). This is true if
at least one of parameters C105 ... C108 is set to 2:UpDownRef. See also the
MOTOR POTENTIOMETER chapter.
15:Dn. When this input closes, it decreases the value of the UpDownRef internal
reference with respect to the ramp set in par. P040 (UpDnRefRamp). This is true if
at least one of parameters C105 ... C108 is set to 2:UpDownRef. See also the
MOTOR POTENTIOMETER chapter.
16:UpDnRefReset. When the input closes, it sets to zero - with no ramps - the
value of the UpDownRef internal reference. See also the MOTOR
POTENTIOMETER chapter.
17:Ext Failure 2. When the input opens, alarm A029 trips.
18:Ext Failure 3. When the input opens, alarm A030 trips.
From SW Vers. D3.09:
19:IN Timer A. When input closes, signal is reproduced to the configurable
digital output set as 12:OUT Timer A. Signal is reproduced based on timing set
for MDO1(2)(3)(4)(5)OnDelay and MDO1(2)(3)(4)(5)OffDly and based on logics
set for MDO1(2)(3)(4)(5)Logic.
20:IN Timer B. When input closes, signal is reproduced to the configurable
digital output set as 13:OUT Timer B. Signal is reproduced based on timing set
for MDO1(2)(3)(4)(5)OnDelay and MDO1(2)(3)(4)(5)OffDly and based on logics
set for MDO1(2)(3)(4)(5)Logic.
168/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
(for MDIxCfg set at 6:Slave Enable). With respect to the external setting of a
current reference, when the internal signal percentage is increased (M014,
M010, M011 or M012) the current reference percentage - displayed by par.
M003 (Iref) - will increase accordingly, until the limit current value is reached.
Beyond that value, the current reference set will be kept constant.
This is shown in the figure by side, where the current reference external setup is
NOTE assumed to be defined by the REF main analog input and C000=50%,
P050=50% and P051=100%.
With two drives configured in MASTER / SLAVE mode, as the reference standard
level supplied by the MASTER drive is 5V at the nominal current (M003 = 100%),
if also the SLAVE drive must supply its nominal current - with said reference at
REF main reference between terminals 5 and 7 - gain P125 (IrefGain) is to be set
at 200%.
M003
+25%
-100% -50%
REF
+25% +100%
-50%
I LIM B
If you set several digital inputs to the same configuration, close at least one of the
NOTE
relevant digital inputs to enable that configuration.
7.3.36 C141: A LARM A016/017 T RIP D ELAY

C141 A016/7 (VAC) P C141 - A016/7(VAC)
**** ms R 0.00 ... 2000 ms
D 1000 s
F This parameter sets, in milliseconds, the delay time of the drive locking when
either alarm A016 (Mains OverVoltage) or A017 (Mains UnderVoltage) trips.
For alarm A017 (Mains UnderVoltage), the delay set through this parameter is
active only if the supply voltage does not decrease under 3/4 of the threshold
value (85% or 80% of the rated value) and if no regeneration braking is in
progress. In any other case, the alarm will immediately trip.
169/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
7.3.37 C142: A LARM A027 T RIP D ELAY

C142 A027 (SLink) P C142 - A027(SLink)
**** s R 1.00 ... 100. s
D 1.00 s
F When the serial communication is selected as a reference or command source,
this parameter sets, in seconds, alarm A027 (Serial Link Failure) trip delay,
provided that no valid message has been sent.
7.3.38 C143: A LARM A028 T RIP D ELAY

C143 A028 (FBus) P C143 - A028(FBus)
**** s R 1.00 ... 100. s
D 1.00 s
F When the field bus is selected as a reference or command source, this
parameter sets, in seconds, alarm A028 (FieldBus Failure) trip delay, provided
that no valid message has been sent.
7.3.39 C150: A LARM A001 T RIP D ISABLING

C150 A001 (Fld) P C150 - A001 (Fld)
*** R 0 ... 1
D 0
F It inhibits alarm A001 (Field Failure) trip.
0:Included. The alarm is enabled.
1:Excluded. The alarm is disabled.

C151 A004 (Load) P C151 - A004 (Load)
*** R 0 ... 1
D 0
F It inhibits alarm A004 (Load Loss).

C153 A006 (fUnst) P C153 - A006(fUnst)
*** R 0 ... 1
D 0
F It inhibits alarm A006 (Unstable Frequency).
170/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL

C154 A007 (Mains) P C154 - A007(Mains)
* R 0 ... 1
D 0
F It inhibits alarm A007 (Mains Failure).
7.3.43 C155: A LARM A008 T RIP M ANAGEMENT

C155 A008 (nFdbk) P C155 - A008(nFdbk)
*** R 0 ... 2
D 0
F This parameter manages alarm A008 (Speed Feedback Failure) trip.
2:Switch to Varm. The alarm is disabled, but a speed feedback loss will cause
the automatic switching of the speed feedback from TACHO or ENCODER to
ARMATURE feedback. If this happens, also warning W002 (Speed Fdbk switched
to Varm) will trip. To reset it, disable the ENABLE digital input.

C156 A010 (ArmOV) P C156 A010(ArmOV)
*** R 0 ... 1
D 0
F This parameter inhibits alarm A010 (Armature OverVoltage) trip.
7.3.45 C157: A LARM A016/017 T RIP D ISABLING

C157 A016/7 (VAC) P C157 - A016/7(VAC)
*** R 0 ... 1
D 0
F It inhibits both alarm A016 (Mains OverVoltage) and A017 alarm (Mains
UnderVoltage).
0:Included. The two alarms are enabled.
1:Excluded. The two alarms are disabled.

C158 A027 (SLink) P C158 - A027 (SLink)
*** R 0 ... 1
D 1
F It inhibits alarm A027 (Serial Link Failure) trip.
171/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL

C159 A028 (FBus) P C159 - A028(FBus)
*** R 0 ... 1
D 1
F It disables alarm A028 (FieldBus Failure) trip.
7.3.48 C160: S ERIAL C ONNECTION D RIVE A DDRESS

C160 DeviceID P C160 - DeviceID
# *** R #1 ... 247
D #1
F This parameter indicates the physical address identifying the DCREG drive in the
MODBUS connection relating to the serial network which it is connected to (if
any).
7.3.49 C161: S ERIAL C ONNECTION T RANSMISSION S PEED

C161 BaudRate P C161 - BaudRate
*** bps R 1200 ... 128000 bps
D 9600 bps
F This parameter expresses the serial connection transmission speed (baud rate) in
bits per second.
1200. The transmission speed is equal to 1200 bps.
...
128000. The transmission speed is equal to 128000 bps.
7.3.50 C162: S ERIAL C ONNECTION PARITY C ONTROL

C162 Parity P C162 - Parity
*** R 0 ... 2
D 0
F This parameter indicates whether the parity control is enabled and specifies the
type of control.
0:None. No parity control is to be found. Each character ends with two STOP
BITS.
1:Even. The parity control is enabled. It is an even parity control (the data to be
transmitted are added a bit, so the total number of 1 is even). Each character
ends with a STOP BIT only.
2:Odd. The parity control is enabled. It is an odd parity control (the data to be
transmitted are added a bit, so the total number of 1 is odd). Each character
ends with a STOP BIT only.
172/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
7.3.51 C163: M ASTER D ATA A REA B ASE A DDRESS

C163 BaseAddress P C163 - BaseAddress
# ***** R # 0 ... 32767
D #0
F This parameter indicates the correspondence between the drive data area and
the master data area.
7.3.52 C164: S ERIAL T IME O UT

C164 RTUTimeOut P C164 RTUTimeOut
**** ms R 0.00 2000 ms
D 300. ms
F This parameter indicates, in milliseconds, the timeout of the drive (time out) while
receiving an additional character, before considering the inquiry transmitted by
the master a concluded message.
7.3.53 C165: S ERIAL R ESPONSE D ELAY

C165 RxTxDelay P C165 - RxTxDelay
**** ms R 0.00 2000 ms
D 0.00 ms
F This parameter concerns the half duplex transmission mode only, like the two-
wire RS485 standard. It defines, in milliseconds, the delay time of the drive
before its response to a master inquiry, to make sure that the latter has already
switched to the listening mode.
7.3.54 C170: L OAD T YPE

C170 LoadType P C170 - LoadType (from SW Vers. D3.09)
*** R 0 ... 1
D 0
F This parameter indicates the load type connected to the output terminals.
0:Motor. Output terminals connected to the armature of a DC motor.
1:Inductance. Output terminals connected to an electromagnet.
173/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
8 DIAGNOSTICS
8.1 ALARM PARAMETERS

These parameters are displayed on the Status page when an alarm trips; in this case, the equipment is
simultaneously locked.
They are marked on the display with an A followed by the parameter number.
TRIP. Whenever a failure is detected, the micro controller operates both the keypad display and the two
seven-segment displays of the control board. The code relating to an alarm is shown and the drive is then
locked.
Delay and disabling. When both alarms A016 (Mains Overvoltage) and A017 (Mains Undervoltage) are
tripped, i.e. the alarms of the out-of-tolerance mains value, their connection may be delayed with
parameter C141. Similarly, alarm A027 (Serial Link Failure) and A028 (FieldBus Failure) may be delayed
through parameters C142 and C143 respectively. The other alarms are characterized by an internal preset
and fixed delay. Finally, the trip of a certain number of alarms may be disabled through parameters C150
159.
STORAGE. When 0.5s have gone by after the display visualization and the device locking because of a
failure, this condition is stored in the EEPROM, except when it occurs while the control section is not
supplied.
Power-on autoreset. The storage in the EEPROM will not occur whenever parameter C092 (PwrOnReset) is
set to value 1:Yes. By cutting out the control section supply, at the following drive power on, it will be ready
to be restarted provided that the alarm cause has been removed.
DELETION. To allow the device restarting, it is necessary to reset (i.e. to delete) the tripped alarm. Of
course, this alarm has to be no more present, i.e. the cause generating it must be removed.
Manual and Automatic Reset. A manual reset may be performed by simultaneously pressing the PROG
and SAVE keys or by closing a digital input which had been programmed as 0:Reset. Alternatively, you
may program an automatic reset (autoreset) by setting any value different from zero on parameter C090
(AutoReset). The drive performs then a complete autoreset when 2s have passed since the removal of the
cause generating the alarm, said autoreset is repeated whenever the alarm is connected again and then
the cause disappears: parameter C090 sets precisely the maximum number of autoreset operations which
may be performed when the minimum time between a reset and the following one - preset on parameter
C091 (AutoResTime) - has not gone by.
If an autoreset has been programmed through parameter C090, it has no effect on alarms A011 (L out of
Range), A014 (R out of Range), A015 (AutoTune Error), A018 (AutoTune Interrupted), A019 (AutoTune
Limitation), A025 (EEPROM WorkArea Failure), A026 (EEPROM BackupArea Failure), A032 (C Reset) and
A033 (Unknown Failure).
Mains micro break. Especially for alarms A006 (Unstable Frequency), A007 (Mains Failure), A012
(Frequency out of Range), A013 (Missing Synchronization) or A017 (Mains Undervoltage) - i.e. the alarms
which may typically trip after a mains micro break on power section - it is possible to program the
autoreset with an unlimited number of autodeletions by means of parameter C093. This operation may be
performed also without programming on parameter C090 the general autoreset for all the other alarms.
RESTART. Whenever the power section is live and the device is able to restart (no alarm detected, supply
enabled on power section, both ENABLE and START digital inputs active), it may be restarted at once or
soon after a temporary enabling and disabling of the ENABLE input, according to what has been
programmed in parameter C094 (StartSafety).
Similarly, also when the power section is constantly supplied, the value of this parameter may either enable
the drive to be restarted or not once a manual or automatic reset has deleted an alarm storage, and the
cause generating the alarm has disappeared.
174/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
8.1.1 A001: F IELD C URRENT F AILURE

A001 Field I A001 - Field Failure
Failure S The alarm trips:
a. When running, in case of a field current failure.
b. Alternatively, during the current auto tuning if the field current has been
detected.
The field current detection control is made through the comparison between par.
M018 (Ifld) and an internal threshold equal to 7.5% of the value of C010 (value
of the nominal field current).
This alarm may be disabled through parameter C150.
NOTE This alarm trips only when the drive is running. It trips after a 2s internal delay.
8.1.2 A002: H EATSINK O VERTEMPERATURE

A002 Heatsink I A002 - Heatsink Trip
Trip S The contact relating to the thermo switch assembled in the drive heatsink is open,
thus signalling that the max. allowable temperature has been exceeded.
When the thermo switch contact is closed, LED SA in control board ES800
NOTE
(ES906) turns on.
After the connection of the mentioned alarm, some minutes should generally
NOTE
elapse before performing a reset.
8.1.3 A003: A RMATURE O VERCURRENT

A003 Armature I A003 - Armature OverCurrent
OverCurrent S The instantaneous value (peak value) of armature overcurrent M004 (Iarm) has
exceeded 200 % of the drive rated current, or 300 % of the drive rated current
under overlimit conditions.
8.1.4 A004: L OAD L OSS

A004 Load I A004 - Load Loss
Loss S The alarm trips:
a. When one of the two connections to the load terminals is cut off.
b. If the DC side fuse (if any) is blown.
8.1.5 A006: U NSTABLE M AINS F REQUENCY

A006 Unstable I A006 - Unstable Mains Frequency
Frequency S The mains frequency voltage varies more than the max. allowable value, equal
to 500ms between two mains periods. This alarm may occur only when the
ENABLE digital input is active. Set disabling through parameter C153 and
continuous autoreset through parameter C093.
175/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
8.1.6 A007: M AINS P HASE F AILURE

A007 Mains I A007 - Mains Failure
Failure S Failure of one of the three mains phases, or more than one. This alarm may
occur only when the ENABLE digital input is active. Set disabling through
parameter C154 and continuous autoreset through parameter C093.
8.1.7 A008: S PEED F EEDBACK F AILURE

A008 Speed Fdbk I A008 - Speed Fdbk Failure
Failure S The alarm trips:
a. When the tacho (or encoder) connection is reversed.
b. When the tacho (or encoder) connection is cut off.
c. In case of the tacho (or encoder) failure.
8.1.8 A009: F IELD O VERCURRENT

A009 Field I A009 - Field OverCurrent
OverCurrent S The value of field current M018 (Ifld) has exceeded the product of C010 C017
(value of the rated field current increased by the value percent set with the boost)
for more than 15%. For the alarm trip, the ENABLE digital input must be active.
The alarm trip is subject to a 10s internal delay. When this alarm trips, the field
current is cut out.
8.1.9 A010: A RMATURE O VERVOLTAGE

A010 Armature I A010 - Armature OverVoltage
OverVoltage S The value of armature voltage M006 (Varm) has exceeded the max. allowable
limit, which is linked with the rated value of the power section supply voltage;
such limit is determined by the following product: C0301.316. For instance, for
a supply voltage nominal value equal to 400Vac, the alarm threshold will remain
equal to 526Vdc. This alarm may be disabled through parameter C156.
8.1.10 A011: A UTO T UNING I NDUCTANCE OUT OF R ANGE

A011 L out of I A011 - L out of Range
Range S The inductance corresponding to equivalent inductive drop P104 (LdI/dt Pred)
resulting from the current auto tuning is not included in the allowable range.
8.1.11 A012: M AINS F REQUENCY OUT OF R ANGE

A012 Frequency I A012 - Frequency out of Range
out of Range S Frequency M008 (MFreq) of the mains is over 70 Hz or is under 40 Hz.
This alarm occurs only when the ENABLE digital input is activated.
Set continuous autoreset through parameter C093.
176/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
8.1.12 A013: S YNCHRONIZATION F AILURE

A013 Missing I A013 - Missing Synchronization
Synchronization S Failure of the circuits supplying the synchronizing signals of the mains three-
phase voltage. This alarm may trip only when the ENABLE digital input is active.
Set continuous autoreset through parameter C093.
8.1.13 A014: A UTO T UNING R ESISTANCE OUT OF R ANGE

A014 R out of I A014 - R out of Range
Range S The resistance corresponding to equivalent resistive drop P103 (RxI Pred)
resulting from the current auto tuning is not included in the allowable range.
8.1.14 A015: T ORQUE D URING C URRENT A UTO T UNING

A015 AutoTune I A015 - AutoTune Error
Error S During the current auto tuning stage (P001=1), the motor torque allows the
motor to rotate at M001 (nFdbk) value higher than approx. 1.5%, due to any
residual magnetism, even if the field is off. This alarm may also occurs if during
the armature resistive drop autotuning (P001=3), the motor torque allows it to
rotate at M001 (nFdbk) speed higher than approx. 1.5% in tacho or encoder
feedback mode, or higher than 10% in encoder feedback mode, because of any
residual magnetism, even if the field is off.
In this case, it is necessary to lock mechanically the motor to perform the
automatic calibration.
8.1.15 A016: M AINS O VERVOLTAGE

A016 Mains I A016 - Mains OverVoltage
OverVoltage S Value M009 of power section mains voltage (Vmains) has exceeded the lowest
limit between the following values: 1) the maximum voltage to be applied
(factory-set) increased by 10%. 2) The rated voltage (C030) increased by 20%.
This alarm may trip only when the ENABLE digital input is active. It may be
delayed through parameter C141 and disabled through parameter C157.
8.1.16 A017: M AINS U NDERVOLTAGE

A017 Mains I A017 - Mains UnderVoltage
UnderVoltage S Value M009 of power section mains voltage (Vmains) is under the rated voltage
limit (C030) for a value equal to 15% in case of drives which are able to
regenerate mains energy (2nd and/or 4th quadrant enabled). Otherwise, it
proves a 20% decrease in case of drives which are not able to regenerate mains
energy (2nd and 4th quadrant disabled). This alarm may occur only when the
ENABLE digital input is active. It may be delayed through parameter C141 and
disabled through parameter C157. Set continuous autoreset through parameter
C093.
The alarm delay (if any) set through par. C141 is active only if the supply voltage
is not under 3/4 of the threshold value (85% or 80% of the rated value) and if no
regenerative braking is in progress. In any other case, the alarm will immediately
trip.
177/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
8.1.17 A018: A UTO T UNING I NTERRUPTED

A018 AutoTune I A018 - AutoTune Interrupted
Interrupted S The current autotuning stage has been interrupted due to the disabling of the
ENABLE digital input.
8.1.18 A019: L IMITATION D URING S PEED A UTO T UNING

A019 AutoTune I A019 - AutoTune Limitation
Limitation S During the speed auto tuning stage, the drive current limit took place.
8.1.19 A020: E XTERNAL A LARM 1

A020 External I A020 - External Failure 1
Failure 1 S The digital input configured by setting one of par. C130 ... C135 to 10:ExtFailure
1 is open.
NOTE
8.1.20 A021: M OTOR T HERMAL P ROTECTION T RIP

A021 Motor I A021 - Motor I2t Trip
I2t Trip S Motor overtemperature. The motor I2t trip depends on the value programmed in
parameters C001 (MotThrshold) and C002 (MotThConst).
NOTE
8.1.21 A022: D RIVE T HERMAL P ROTECTION T RIP

A022 Drive I A022 - Drive It Trip
It Trip S Drive overtemperature. The alarm trip depends on the drive factory-set values.
8.1.22 A023: F IELD W EAKENING M IN . C URRENT L IMIT

A023 Ifld I A023 Ifld Underlimited
Underlimited S During the dynamic regulation in field regulation mode, the alarm trips if the
field current may no longer decrease because it is locked by the min. value
defined by par. C016 (IfldMinLim) when the motor speed increases. The current
may not decrease below par. C016 value. This alarm - that may have a 500ms
internal delay-may trip due to a too high value set in par. C016 or the motor
excessive speed. This alarm resets the field current value. See also the FIELD
REGULATOR chapter.
178/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
8.1.23 A024: EEPROM M ISSING OR B LANK

A024 Missing I A024 - Missing or blank EEPROM
or blank EEPROM S At the drive power on, the alarm trips:
a. If EEPROM is missing.
b. If EEPROM is not programmed.
WARNING This alarm cannot be deleted. Please contact ELETTRONICA SANTERNO.
8.1.24 A025: W RONG PARAMETERS IN EEPROM W ORK A REA

A025 EEPROM I A025 - EEPROM WorkArea Failure
WorkArea Failure S The content of some part in EEPROM work area is altered. In that case, the
alarm is to be reset. Then, warning W006 or W008 will be displayed (see the
relevant sections explaining what to do in that case).
8.1.25 A026: EEPROM W RONG B ACKUP PARAMETERS

A026 EEPROM I A026 - EEPROM BackupArea Failure
BackupArea Fail. S The content of some part in EEPROM work area is altered. In that case, the
alarm is to be reset. Then, warning W007 or W009 will be displayed (see the
relevant sections explaining what to do in that case).
8.1.26 A027: S ERIAL C OMMUNICATION F AILURE

A027 Serial I A027 - Serial Link Failure
Link Failure S This alarm trips if the drive is not sent any valid message within the time set (time
out) in par. C142 (A027(Slink)) when the drive is serial-connected to the master.
The serial communication protocol selected for DCREG Series drives is the
MODBUS type, according to the RTU transmission mode. The alarm may trip
only if the serial communication is selected either as a possible reference source
or as a possible command source, i.e. when at least one of par. C105 C108
(RefSelx) or C110 C112 (SeqSelx) is set at 3:Serial Link.
The alarm may be disabled through par. C158.
8.1.27 A028: C ONNECTION WITH F IELD B US F AILURE

A028 FieldBus I A028 - FieldBus Failure
Failure S This alarm trips if the drive is not sent any valid message within the time set (time
out) in par. C143 (A028(FBus)) when the drive is serial-connected to the master.
The alarm may trip only if the bus field is selected either as a possible reference
source or as a possible command source, i.e. when at least one of par. C105
C108 (RefSelx) or C110 C112 (SeqSelx) is set at 4:FieldBus.
The alarm may be disabled through par. C159.
179/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL

Failure 2 S The digital input configured by setting one of par. C130 C135 at 17:Ext
Failure 2 is open.

Failure 3 S The digital input configured by setting one of par. C130 C135 to 18:Ext
Failure 3 is open.
8.1.30 A031: EEPROM W ORK A REA I NTERNAL D ATA A LTERED

A031 Internal I A031 - Internal EEPROM Failure
EEPROM Failure S When the equipment is turned on, the data that cannot be accessed by the user
and that are contained in the EEPROM work area, are altered. See also the
PARAMETER COPY chapter.
WARNING This alarm cannot be deleted. Please contact ELETTRONICA SANTERNO.
8.1.31 A032: M ICROCONTROLLER R ESET

A032 C I A032 C Reset
Reset S The execution of the drive control program has been cancelled by the micro
controller itself, due to an invalid statement read by FLASH memory. In that case,
you just need to reset the alarm.
8.1.32 A033: U NKNOWN F AILURE

A033 Unknown I A033 - Unknown Failure
Failure S An unknown alarm has been stored. In that case, you just need to reset the
alarm.
8.1.33 A DDITIONAL A LARMS

This message usually pops up when control board ES800 (ES906) begins to supply
POWER ON the keypad for the first time. If the message does not disappear, this means that the
keypad is live but the control board communication is shut off.
** ERROR# 1 ** Said message is displayed when a time out has elapsed. This means that the micro
LINK MISMATCH controller on the keypad has detected a communication break with control board
ES800 (ES906).
In both cases, if 88 is displayed along with one of the two messages (or some other digits other than 00 for
Drive OK, two blinking digits for an alarm or two fixed digits for a warning) control board ES800 (ES906) is
probably damaged and shall be replaced.
180/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
8.2 WARNING PARAMETERS

The warning parameters are displayed in the Status page to indicate that a particular condition is taking
place, although the drive is not locked.
Those parameters are marked by a W followed by the parameter number.
8.2.1 W002: S PEED F EEDBACK L OSS

W002 Speed Fdbk I W002 - Speed Fdbk switched to Varm
Switched to Varm S The drive has switched from tacho or encoder feedback to armature feedback.
When the run contacts open, the warning disappears and the equipment restores
the prior feedback type.
8.2.2 W003: HARDWARE LIMIT CURRENT NOT AT MAXIMUM VALUE

W003 Imax [T2] I W003 - Imax [T2] <100%
< 100% S Should the display show warning message W003 (Imax [T2] <100%), trimmer T2
of control board ES800 (ES906) has NOT been completely rotated clockwise. The
trimmer indicates a hardware limitation of the armature current, which is also a
wrong position. In fact it would cause a disagreement between the preset current
limit values (shown by the display) and the maximum armature current to be
obtained. Then, the latter value would be lower than that required.
In this case it is necessary to turn trimmer T2 completely clockwise. Then, the
warning disappears. Trimmer T2 is located on the right side of board ES800
(ES906), near the two 7-segment displays which can be seen through the small
slot on the drive cover. The trimmer should be used by the Service personnel only,
to temporarily reduce all the current limits during special test performances. After
that, it should be reset to its maximum position.
8.2.3 W004: S AFE R ESTART AFTER AN A LARM R ESET

W004 Open-Close I W004 - Open-Close ENABLE to run
ENABLE to run S If par. C094 (StartSafety) is set to 1:Yes and an alarm tripped has been manually
or automatically reset, this warning indicates the steps to take for the drive
restart. This warning disappears when the ENABLE input opens.
8.2.4 W005: R ESTART AFTER AN E MERGENCY S TOP FROM K EYPAD

W005 Open-Close I W005 - Open-Close START to run
START to run S If the equipment has been stopped by pressing the STOP key on the keypad
(par. C103 (EmergStop) set on purpose), this warning indicates the steps to take
for the drive restart. This warning disappears when the START input opens.
181/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
8.2.5 W006: B ACKUP V ALUES S TORED IN RAM

W006 Backup I W006 - Backup parameters used
parameters used S This warning may pop up after resetting Alarm A025 (EEPROM WorkArea
Failure). It indicates that the backup parameter values have been loaded in the
drive RAM. Provided that these values are the required values (i.e. provided that
the P002 command 2:WorkAreaBackup has been sent after starting the
equipment) the equipment could be normally started, but the alarm will be
displayed when the equipment is started again. We recommend to rewrite the
EEPROM work area by restoring the backup values through command P002
3:Backup Restore (the warning disappears).
8.2.6 W007: D EFAULT V ALUES S TORED IN RAM

W007 Default I W007 - Default parameters used
parameters used S This warning may pop up after resetting Alarm A026 (EEPROM BackupArea
Fail.). It indicates that the default parameters have been stored in the equipment
RAM. In general, this could cause some problems at the drive power on. The
default values are then to be entered through the P002 1:DefaultRestore
command. In addition, if the equipment has been already started, in the
EEPROM work area manually store the parameter values noted down at the end
of the startup procedure. Always copy these values also in the backup area
through the P002 2:WorkAreaBackup command (the warning will disappear).
8.2.7 W008: W RONG PARAMETERS IN EEPROM W ORK A REA

W008 EEPROM I W008 - EEPROM WorkArea Failure
WorkArea Failure S This warning may pop up after resetting Alarm A025 (EEPROM WorkArea
Failure). It indicates that the work area copy to the EEPROM work area has failed
due to the alteration of the work area values. In general, the equipment may be
normally started, but the warning should reappear when the drive is powered on
again. Always enter the default values through the P002 1:DefaultRestore
command (the warning will disappear). In addition, if the equipment has been
already started, in the EEPROM work area manually store the parameter values
noted down at the end of the startup procedure. The P002 2:WorkAreaBackup
command may be resent.
8.2.8 W009: W RONG PARAMETERS IN EEPROM B ACKUP A REA

W008 EEPROM I W009 - EEPROM Backup Area Fail.
WorkArea Failure S This warning may pop up after resetting Alarm A026 (EEPROM BackupArea
Fail.). It indicates that the work area copy to the EEPROM work area has failed
due to the alteration of the work area values. In general, the equipment may be
normally started, but we suggest that the default values be entered through the
P002 1:DefaultRestore if the values saved in the work area do not correspond
to the values required. Then, manually store the parameter values noted down at
the end of the startup procedure. Always copy these values in the backup area
through the P002 2:WorkAreaBackup command (the warning will disappear).
182/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
9 EMC CHARACTERISTICS AND INPUT FILTER
The drive EMC product standard refers to systems such as motors and converters as well as to their power
supply and auxiliary circuits.
The standard defines the drive immunity and emission requirements with several tests to be applied to the
equipment above:
- complete drives (PDS, power drive systems) composed of a drive, a motor, the transducers and sensors;
- CDM, complete drive module, composed of motorless drives;
- BDM, basic drive module, composed of both control and power section.
The standard also defines the environments and commercial distribution modes for which the drives are to
be equipped with optional RFI filtering devices:
FIRST ENVIRONMENT Includes civic and industrial users who are directly connected (with no
intermediate transformers) to a low-voltage grid intended for domestic
users.
SECOND ENVIRONMENT Includes any industrial user other than those who are directly connected
to a low-voltage grid intended for domestic users.
UNRESTRICTED The drive is also supplied to those users who do not have any EMC
DISTRIBUTION specific competence.
RESTRICTED The drive is supplied to those users who are EMC competent
DISTRIBUTION
As for RFI filters aimed at decreasing the radio frequency disturbance, the product standard includes
different prescriptions depending on the environment where the drive is installed and on the commercial
distribution system.
First environment
The appliances to be connected to a low-voltage grid also intended for civic users shall comply with the
following restrictions:
UNRESTRICTED DISTRIBUTION, I < 25A
Size Frequency band Quasi-peak Average

Low-voltage 0.15 f 0.5MHz 66 to 56dB(V) 56 to 46dB(V)
drive 0.5 f 5.0 56 46
(I < 25A) 5.0 f 30.0 60 50
Corresponds to the limits for EN55011 gr.1 cl.B - EN55022 cl.B - VDE0875G
UNRESTRICTED DISTRIBUTION, I 25A

Medium power 0.15 f 0.5 MHz 79dB(V) 66dB(V)
drive 0.5 f 5.0 73 60
(I 25A) 5.0 f 30.0 73 60
Corresponds to the limits for EN55011 gr.1 cl.A - EN55022 cl.A - VDE0875N
183/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
RESTRICTED DISTRIBUTION, I < 25A

Low-power 0.15 f 0.5MHz 79dB(V) 66dB(V)
drive 0.5 f 5.0 73 60
(I < 25A) 5.0 f 30.0 73 60
Corresponds to the limits for EN55011 Gr.1 cl.A - EN55022 cl.A - VDE0875N
RESTRICTED DISTRIBUTION, I 25A

Medium power 0.15 f 0.5MHz 79dB(V) 66dB(V)
drive 0.5 f 5.0 73 60
(I 25A) 5.0 f 30.0 73 60
Corresponds to the limits for EN55011 Gr.1 cl.A - EN55022 cl.A - VDE0875N
NOTE. Standards EN55011 and 55022 above define the limits and the measuring methods of the radio
interference for some product categories.
Particularly:
EN55011/ IEC CISPR11: Limits and measuring methods of radio interference specifications for industrial,
scientific and medical equipment (ISM).
EN55022/ IEC CISPR22: Limits and measuring methods of radio interference specifications generated by
the equipment for information technology (ITE).
The limits for the disturbance of ISM equipment belonging to group 1 class A in EN55011 correspond to
those for ITE equipment belonging to class A in EN55022. The limits for the disturbance of ISM equipment
belonging to group 1 class B in EN55011correspond to those for ITE equipment belonging to class B in
EN55022.
The following table shows the filter types to be used for any drive model.
If the actual power supply of the drive power section exceeds the filter nominal
NOTE
voltage, contact Elettronica Santerno.
184/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
Filter nominal voltage Filter nominal current

Drive type Filter type Filter code
@ 50/60Hz @ Tamb=40C
DCREG.10 FX12 3 x 12A AC1710213
DCREG.20 FX20 3 x 20A AC1710221
DCREG.40 FX50 3 x 50A AC1710506
DCREG.70 FX65 3 x 65A AC1710706
480V
DCREG.100 FX90 3 x 90A AC1710906
DCREG.150 FX120 3 x 120A AC1711106
DCREG.180 FX150 3 x 150A AC1711306
DCREG.250 FX210 3 x 210A AC1711606
DCREG.350 FLTA-B 280T 3 x 280A AC1711805
460V
DCREG.750 FLTA-B 600T 660V 3 x 600A AC1712610
Always connect AC/DC drives with RFI filters to low-voltage grids in residential
WARNING
areas, as they may produce radio frequency disturbance.
The filter is to be installed between three-phase switching inductance L and

NOTE the drive input and is to be connected to bars L1-2-3. The wires connecting
the filter to the drive are to be as short as possible.
Second environment
The product standard does not state any limit for the equipment disturbances and radio frequency
interferences for any equipment to be connected to a low-voltage industrial grid or to a civic grid which is
not used for residential areas.
For the second environment, the product standard allows to use any drive with no additional RFI filter.
However, the installer has to make sure that there is no electromagnetic compatibility trouble with the
other appliances in the system.
185/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
10 USERS PARAMETERS DIFFERENT FROM DEFAULT

VALUES
Modified Modified
PAR. Setting Default value PAR. Setting Default value
value value
P003 ProgLevel 0:Basic P058 Clim 50 %
P004 FirstPage 0:Status P059 dI/dtMax .40 %/s
P005 FirstParm Select (P006) P060 OverLimA 100 %
P006 MeasureSel ******** P061 OverLimB 100 %
P010 nFdbkMax 2500 RPM P062 TFullOvLim 2.00 s
400 V
(DCREG4)
P011 VarmMax P070 KpSpeed 4.00
460 V
(DCREG2)
P012 SpdDmndPol 0:Bipolar P071 TiSpeed 1.00 s
P013 nMaxPos 100 % P073 KpSpdAdapt 4.00
P014 nMinPos 0% P074 TiSpdAdapt 1.00 s
P015 nMaxNeg -100 % P076 KpSpeed2 4.00
P016 nMinNeg 0% P077 TiSpeed2 1.00 s
P030 RampUpPos 0.000 s P079 KpSpdAdapt2 4.00
P031 RampDnPos 0.000 s P080 TiSpdAdapt2 1.00 s
P032 RampUpNeg 0.000 s P082 AdaptCtrl 0:No
P033 RampDnNeg 0.000 s P083 Verr1 .500 %
P034 RampStopPos 0.000 s P084 Verr2 1.00 %
P035 RampStopNeg 0.000 s P085 TiRampScale x1
P036 RampUpJog 0.000 s P086 ArmatureCmp 100 %
P037 RampDnJog 0.000 s P087 VerrOffset 0.000 %
P038 InitialRndg 0.0 s P088 RxI 0V
P039 FinalRndg 0.0 s P100 KpCurr .200
P040 UpDnRefRamp 10.00 s P101 TiCurrDisc 1.30 ms
P050 Ilim1A 100 % P102 TiCurrCont 32.0 ms
100 % (DCREG4)
P051 Ilim1B P103 RxI Pred 70.92 V
0 % (DCREG2)
P052 Ilim2A 100 % P104 LdI/dt Pred 0.707 V
100 % (DCREG4)
P053 Ilim2B P110 KpFld 2.00
0 % (DCREG2)
P054 Speed 12 100 % P111 TiFld .100 s
P055 IlimHyper 100 % P120 VrefPol 0:Bipolar
P056 SpeedHyper1 100 % P121 VrefBias 0.000 %
P057 SpeedHyper2 100 % P122 VrefGain 100.0 %
186/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
Modified Modified
value value
P123 IrefPol 0:Bipolar P178 MDO2OffDly 0.000 s
P124 IrefBias 0.000 % P179 MDO2Level 3%
P125 IrefGain 100.0 % P180 MDO2Hyst 2%
0:Normally
P126 AnIn1Pol 0:Bipolar P181 MDO2Logic
Open
P127 AnIn1Bias 0.000 % P182 MDO3Cfg 2:Iarm Threshold
P128 AnIn1Gain 100.0 % P183 MDO3OnDelay 0.000 s
P129 AnIn2Pol 0:Bipolar P184 MDO3OffDly 0.000 s
P130 AnIn2Bias 0.000 % P185 MDO3Level 50 %
P131 AnIn2Gain 100.0 % P186 MDO3Hyst 2%
0:Normally
P132 AnIn3Pol 0:Bipolar P187 MDO3Logic
Open
P133 AnIn3Bias 0.000 % P188 MDO4Cfg 5:Drive Running
P134 AnIn3Gain 100.0 % P189 MDO4OnDelay 0.000 s
P150 AnOut1Cfg 0:0 Volt P190 MDO4OffDly 0.000 s
P151 AnOut1Bias 0.000 % P191 MDO4Level 5%
P152 AnOut1Gain 100.0 % P192 MDO4Hyst 2%
0:Normally
P153 AnOut2Cfg 0:0 Volt P193 MDO4Logic
Open
P154 AnOut2Bias 0.000 % P194 MDO5Cfg 4:CurrLimitation
P155 AnOut2Gain 100.0 % P195 MDO5OnDelay 0.000 s
0:Bipolar
(DCREG4)
P156 IOutPol P196 MDO5OffDly 0.000 s
1:Positive only
(DCREG2)
P157 AnOut1Pol 0:Bipolar P197 MDO5Level 50 %
P158 AnOut2Pol 0:Bipolar P198 MDO5Hyst 2%
0:Normally
P170 MDO1Cfg 0:Drive OK P199 MDO5Logic
Open
P171 MDO1OnDelay 0.000 s P211 PresetSpd1 5.00 %
P172 MDO1OffDly 0.000 s P212 PresetSpd2 20.0 %
P173 MDO1Level 50 % P213 PresetSpd3 10.0 %
P174 MDO1Hyst 2% P214 PresetSpd4 0.00 %
0:Normally
P175 MDO1Logic P215 PresetSpd5 -5.00 %
Open
1:Speed
P176 MDO2Cfg P216 PresetSpd6 -20.0 %
Threshold
P177 MDO2OnDelay 0.000 s P217 PresetSpd7 -10.0 %
187/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
Modified Modified
value value
0:Common
P221 JogSelect C072 EncoderPls 1024 pls/R
Ramps
P222 Jog1 5.00 % C074 Tach Volts 60 V / 1000 RPM
P223 Jog2 -5.00 % C090 AutoReset 0 times
P224 Jog3 0.00 % C091 AutoResTime 300 s
30.0 (DCREG4)
P230 AlfaMin C092 PwrOnReset 0:No
25.0 (DCREG2)
P231 AlfaMax 150. C093 MainsReset 1:Yes
P240 LowPassCnst 0.00 ms C094 StartSafety 0:No
P250 UpDnRefPol 0:Bipolar C100 LocRemSel 0:Enabled
P251 UpDnRefMem 1:Yes C101 PwrOnTime 10.0 s
C000 Inom 100 % C102 ZeroingTime 200.0 ms
C001 MotThrshold 110 % C103 EmergStop 1:Excluded
C002 MotThConst 300 s C105 RefSel1 1:Terminal
C010 IfldNom 10.0 % C106 RefSel2 0:Disabled
C011 BaseSpeed 33 % C107 RefSel3 0:Disabled
C012 BaseVarm 1000 V C108 RefSel4 0:Disabled
C014 FldEcoLevel 10 % C110 SeqSel1 1:Terminal
C015 FldEcoDelay 240 s C111 SeqSel2 0:Disabled
C016 IfldMinLim 25 % C112 SeqSel3 0:Disabled
C017 FldFrcLevel 100 % C120 AnIn1Cfg 0:Excluded
C018 FldFrcTime 10. s C121 AnIn2Cfg 0:Excluded
C030 VmainsNom 400 V C122 AnIn3Cfg 0:Excluded
C050 SpdLoopSel 1:PI operating C130 MDI1Cfg 0:Reset
C051 CurrLoopSel 0:PI operating C131 MDI2Cfg 12:JogA
C052 FldLoopSel 0:PI operating C132 MDI3Cfg 13:JogB
C060 1stQ-FwdMot 0:Enabled C133 MDI4Cfg 1:Preset Speed A
C061 2ndQ-RevReg 0:Enabled C134 MDI5Cfg 4:Clim
0:Enabled
(DCREG4)
C062 3rdQ-RevMot C135 MDI6Cfg 5:Reverse
1:Disabled
(DCREG2)
0:Enabled
(DCREG4)
C063 4thQ-FwdReg C141 A016/7(VAC) 1000 ms
1:Disabled
(DCREG2)
2:Tach 80250
C070 nFdbkSelect C142 A027(Slink) 1.00 s
V
188/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
Modified Modified
value value
C143 A028(Fbus) 1.00 s C159 A028(Fbus) 1:Excluded
C150 A001 (Fld) 0:Included C160 DeviceID #1
C151 A004(Load) 0:Included C161 BaudRate 9600 bps
C153 A006(fUnst) 0:Included C162 Parity 0:None
C154 A007(Mains) 0:Included C163 BaseAddress #0
C155 A008(nFdbk) 0:Included C164 RTUTimeOut 300. ms
C156 A010(ArmOV) 0:Included C165 RxTxDelay 0.00 ms
C157 A016/7(VAC) 0:Included C170 LoadType 0:Motor
C158 A027(SLink) 1:Excluded
189/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

Via G. Di Vittorio, 3 - 40020 Casalfiumanese (BO) - Italy
AS MANUFACTURER
DECLARE
UNDER OUR SOLE RESPONSABILITY
THAT THE THREE-PHASE AC/DC CONVERTERS OF DCREG2DCREG4 TYPES,

AND RELATED ACCESSORIES,
TO WHICH THIS DECLARATION RELATES,
APPLIED UNDER CONDITIONS SUPPLIED IN THE USERS MANUAL,
CONFORMS TO THE FOLLOWING STANDARDS OR NORMATIVE DOCUMENTS:
EN 61800-3 (1996-10) Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems.

Part 3: EMC product standard including specific test methods.
EN 55011 (1998-05) Limits and methods of measurement of radio disturbance characteristics of

industrial, scientific and medical (ISM) radio-frequency equipment.
EN 61000-4-2 (1995-03) Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Part 4: Testing and measurement

techniques.
Section 2: Electrostatic discharge immunity test. Basic EMC Publication.

techniques.
Section 3: Radiated, radio-frequency, electromagnetic field immunity test.

techniques.
Section 4: Electrical fast transient/burst immunity test. Basic EMC Publication.

techniques.
Section 5: Surge immunity test.
FOLLOWING THE PROVISIONS OF ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY DIRECTIVE

89/336/EEC AND SUBSEQUENT AMENDMENTS 92/31/EEC, 93/68/EEC AND 93/97/EEC.
190/192
DCREG2 15P0059B3
DCREG4 USER
MANUAL
EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

AS MANUFACTURER
DECLARE

EN 60146-1-1 (1993-02) Semiconductor converters.

General requirements and line commutated converters.
Part 1-1: Specifications of basic requirements.
EN60146-1-3 (1993-02) Semiconductor converters.
General requirements and line commutated converters.
Part 1-3: Transformers and reactors.
IEC 664-1 (1992-10) Insulation coordination for equipment within low-voltage systems.
Part 1: Principles, requirements and tests.
EN 61800-1 (1998-02) Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems.
Part 1:Rating specifications for low voltage d.c. power drive systems.
EN 60204-1 (1997-12) Safety of machinery. Electrical equipment of machines.
EN 60204-1 Electrical equipment of industrial machines.
Modifica 1 (1988-08) Part 2: Item designation and examples of drawings, diagrams, tables and
instructions.
EN 60529 (1991-10) Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code).
EN 50178 (1997-10) Electronic equipment for use in power installations.
FOLLOWING THE PROVISIONS OF LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 73/23/EEC AND SUBSEQUENT

AMENDMENT 93/68/EEC.
LAST TWO DIGITS OF THE YEAR IN WHICH THE CE MARKING WAS AFFIXED: 99
191/192
15P0059B3 DCREG2
USER DCREG4
MANUAL
MANUFACTURERS DECLARATION

AS MANUFACTURER
DECLARE

APPLIED UNDER CONDITIONS SUPPLIED IN THE USERS MANUAL,
EN 60204-1 (1997-12) Safety of machinery. Electrical equipment of machines.

EN 60204-1 Electrical equipment of industrial machines.
Modifica 1 (1988-08) Part 2: Item designation and examples of drawings, diagrams, tables and
instructions.
AND MUST NOT BE PUT INTO SERVICE UNTIL THE MACHINERY INTO WHICH IT IS TO BE
INCORPORED HAS BEEN DECLARED IN CONFORMITY WITH THE PROVISIONS OF MACHINERY
DIRECTIVE 89/392/EEC AND SUBSEQUENT AMENDMENTS 91/368/EEC, 93/44/EEC AND
93/68/EEC.
192/192

Santerno Dcreg2 Dcreg4 d500 Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Santerno Dcreg2 Dcreg4 d500 Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Santerno Dcreg2 Dcreg4 d500 Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

15P0059B3

Elettronica Santerno S.p.A.

5.2 BLOCK DIAGRAM ...............................................................................................................72

7.2 PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS ..........................................................................................122

7.2.57 P120: Speed / Voltage Main Input Polarity ................................................................ 140

7.3.29 C101: Delay from Starting Enabling ..........................................................................161

8.1.30 A031: EEPROM Work Area Internal Data Altered....................................................... 180

- ELETTRONICA SANTERNO S.p.A. - - MADE IN ITALY -

1. The device is called DCREG4.350. It is an AC/DC digital-operated drive.

2.2 PRELIMINARY CHECKS

The standard equipment may be supplied on terminals 53-54 (control section)

2.3 MAIN CHECKS AND CONFIGURATIONS

Whenever the display shows an alarm condition, it is necessary to reset it by

The displaying of warning message W003 (Imax[T2] <100%) means that it is

2.4 SPEED CONTROL MODE OPERATION

Whenever a (0)4 20mA reference is to be used, refer to the chapter dealing

2.5 RAMP CONFIGURATION IN SPEED CONTROL MODE

2.6 SPEED CONTROL OPTIONS

2.7 CURRENT (TORQUE) CONTROL MODE OPERATION

2.8 CURRENT LIMIT CONTROL OPTIONS

2.9 ANALOG AND DIGITAL OUTPUTS

2.10 BACKUP AND RESTORATION OF STORED PARAMETERS

3.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

SUPPLY Control section: from 380500Vac single-phase alternate voltage (or

SPEED REACTION From tacho, encoder, or armature feedback. Possibility of automatically

FIELDBUS ProfiBus-DP available. By request, InterBus, DeviceNet, ControlNet, CANopen

ACCURACY 0.1% of rated speed following:

From speed feedback failure: alarm A008.

STANDARDS DCREG drives comply with Low-Voltage Directive and Electromagnetic

Low-voltage DIRECTIVE (73/23/CEE and following amendment 93/68/CEE):

EN60146-1-1/IEC146-1-1: Semiconductor converters. General requirements

EN61800-2/IEC1800-2: Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems. Part

EN50178: Electronic equipment for use in power installations. pollution

EN60529/IEC529: Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code).

EN60204-1/IEC204-1: Safety of machinery. Electrical equipment of machines.

ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY DIRECTIVE (89/336/CEE and following

EN61000-4-3/IEC1000-4-3: Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Part 4:

EN61000-4-4/IEC1000-4-4: Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Part 4:

EN61000-4-5/IEC1000-4-5: Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Part 4:

- RADIOFREQUENCY RADIATED DISTURBANCE:

RELATIVE HUMIDITY 20 90% (non-condensing).

48 kg for DCREG4 except for:

MODULAR.S (Total weight of control unit + power unit)

DCREG2(4) Size 1 ... 2A

DCREG2(4) Size 1 ... 2A / DCREG2(4) MODULAR.S

500x275x860 (Size F) DCREG4.1400S 1400 4200

DCREG2(4) Size 1 ... 2A / DCREG2(4) MODULAR.S

500x275x665 (Size L) DCREG2.1050S 1050 3150

620x360x884 (Size B) DCREG2.2300S

DCREG2(4) Size 1 ... 2A / DCREG2(4) MODULAR.S

500x275x665 (Size L) DCREG2.1050S

620x495x1434 (Size H) DCREG4.2300S

3.3 DCREG SIZE 1 OVERALL DIMENSIONS

3.4 DCREG SIZE 1 THROUGH-PANEL ASSEMBLY

1 - Direction of the cooling air flow

3.5 DCREG SIZE 2 OVERALL DIMENSIONS

3.6 DCREG SIZE 2A OVERALL DIMENSIONS

252 (FASTENING JIG)

3.7 DCREG SIZE 2 AND SIZE 2A THROUGH-PANEL

1 - Direction of the secondary cooling air flow

~ ~ f r-----.rL J,__... --j ('"